Panasonic | DMREX773 | Operating instructions | Panasonic DMREX773 Operating Instructions

2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX773EB
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product.
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.
Notice for DVB functions
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV
or encrypted channels unless connected to an external source capable of receiving
Pay TV or encrypted channels.
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according
to where they are sold.
≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
ALL
2
3
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
Model number suffix “EB” denotes UK model.
VQT2J34
EB
until
2010/1/25
P8 – 14
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 1 ページ
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 2 ページ
Getting
started
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Features
Convenient Functions!
Linked operations with the TV
Easy access to various functions
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and
receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link.
≥ Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link
“HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link) (> 42)
You can access the main function quickly and
easily from FUNCTION MENU.
≥ FUNCTION MENU Display (> 41)
Select
a function
and an item.
FUNCTION MENU
VIERA
Remain
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
30:00 SP
Video
Picture
Music
You can access
selected function
easily.
Grouped Titles
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
DELETE Navigator
HDD
OK
RETURN
VIDEO
10/10
Chantal Show
11/10
Dolphins
Previous
DIGA
OK
VIERA remote control
Pause the TV programme you are watching
≥ Pause Live TV (> 41)
OPTION
RETURN
PICTURE
2
Next
Page 02/02
Select Previous
Info
MUSIC
Next
FREEVIEW+TM functions
≥ Guide Link (> 22)
≥ Series recording (> 33)
≥ Split Programme (> 22)
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment
You can set the Timer Recordings on Digital STB/
Digital Satellite Receiver when it is connected to
this unit with Scart cable.
≥ Ext Link (> 28)
Easy to Find and Select!
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the daily/weekly or
series timer recording mode are bundled and
displayed as one item.
High Quality Picture
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
2
Grouped title
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
≥ Connection with HDMI terminal (> 12)
≥ Deep Colour (> 92)
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Next
Page 02/02
Select Previous
Info
Next
Digital Switchover
Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by TV region. If
you are missing any channels, it may be that they are not available in your area, or that your aerial needs
upgrading.
If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk
Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts some Digital TV programmes will be missing.
You will need to retune your DVD Recorder each time this happens to recover your digital programmes.
To retune your DVD Recorder¼“DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu (> 71)
2
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 3 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement
parts.
(Product numbers correct as of December 2009. These may be subject to change.)
∏ 1 Remote control (N2QAYB000462)
∏ 1 AC mains lead (K2CT2YY00003)
≥For use with this unit only. Do not use it with
other equipment. Also, do not use cords for
other equipment with this unit.
∏ 2 Batteries for remote control
(R6 Size)
∏ 1 RF coaxial cable (K1TWACC00003)
Sales and Support Information
Customer Care Centre
≥For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852
≥For customers within the Republic of Ireland: 01 289 8333
≥Visit our website for product information
www.panasonic.co.uk
≥E-mail: customer.care@panasonic.co.uk
Direct Sales at Panasonic UK
≥For customers: 0844 844 3856
≥Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease
and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre Monday–
Thursday 9.00 a.m.–5.30 p.m., Friday 9.30 a.m.–5.30 p.m
(Excluding public holidays).
≥Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at
www.pas-europe.com.
≥Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
≥All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided
directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
≥It couldn’t be simpler!
≥Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide
range of finished products, take a browse on our website for further
details.
Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee?
Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website
www.panasonic.co.uk/guarantee.
Caution for AC Mains Lead
For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your
safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved by
ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark Ï or the BSI mark Ì on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is
refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement
cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer.
CAUTION!
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE
SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE
REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE
CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13- AMPERE SOCKET.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH
TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE LETTER E, BY THE
EARTH SYMBOL Ó OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN/YELLOW.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains plug
(figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the
instructions below.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.
1.Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse cover
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as stated
below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the
following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red.
2.Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Fuse
(5 ampere)
3
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 4 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Safety precautions
Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in
the United States and other countries.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
The FREEVIEW service is subject to coverage.
An aerial upgrade may be required. The FREEVIEW,
FREEVIEW+, FREEVIEW HD and FREEVIEW+ HD words and
logos are trade marks of DTV Services LTD.
DTV Services Ltd 2002, 2008.
Table of Contents
Getting started
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caution for AC Mains Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control Information/Unit Care/Disc care . . . . . . . .
Location of Parts/Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
3
3
4
6
7
8
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
The Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Connecting to a Television only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver:
Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite Receiver . . . . 11
Connecting AC mains lead (included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) Cable (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting the Channels and Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HDD and Disc Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Play-only Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Discs that Cannot be Played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Types of disc or title recorded on
HDD for the type of connected TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
USB Memory Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inserting Disc/USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Inserting Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Inserting/Removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Basic Operations
Watching Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Watching Digital Satellite Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs . . . . . 20
Recording Television Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Deleting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Deleting Titles During Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Advanced Features
Notes for Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Advanced Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Recording Modes and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
When the format confirmation screen is displayed . . . . . . . . . . 26
When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Specifying the Recording Time
— One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver or External
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Manual Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Linked timer recordings with external equipment (SKY Digital
STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Advanced Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Manual timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Language for broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle . . . . 29
To cancel a timer recording in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . 30
Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve Overlapping . . . . . 30
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) . . . . . 30
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4
VQT2J34
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
View advertisement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or
category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Searching for the programme from the GUIDE Plus+ list. . . . . 34
Advanced Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting Titles to Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick View (Play k 1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slow-motion Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frame-by-Frame Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . 37
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start Slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
37
38
38
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
To play music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Useful functions during music play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Convenient Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
ControlTM”/Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Easy control only with VIERA remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Information Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Digital Channel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
New Channel Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Advanced Editing
Titles—Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Accessing the Title View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Title Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Chapters—Creating and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Accessing the Chapter View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Chapter Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . 49
Accessing the Playlist (Video) View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Creating Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still Pictures and Music—Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View. . . . . . . . . . . .
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the Album and Track View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Album and Track Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator . . .
51
51
53
53
53
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . . . . 54
Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Playlists (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
54
55
55
Copying titles or Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Copying using the copying list
—Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Copy Video ( MPEG2 ) from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Copying new still pictures on USB memory
—Copy New Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Copying music to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying music from a CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/
DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting Menus
P8 – 14
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 5 ページ
Setting On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Accessing the On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
HDD and DVD Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Accessing the Management Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Accessing the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback/Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Picture and Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Display and Connection Settings/System Settings . . . . . . 74
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Other Settings
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV. . . . . . . . . 77
Reference
Additional Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Using an Audio/Video Cable (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adding an Amplifer or Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
On the Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
On the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
When Other Panasonic Products Respond
to this Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
To Reset This Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General Issues:Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
General Issues:Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
General Issues:Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
General Issues:GUIDE Plus+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
General Issues:DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
General Issues:VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
General Issues:USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Playback Issues:Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Playback Issues:Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Playback Issues:Still Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Recording Issues:
Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input . . . . . . . 90
Recording Issues:Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Editing Issues: HDD & DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Editing Issues: Still Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back Cover
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.
5
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 6 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstan d vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan and
the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that generates
heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
DO NOT
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
≥Place in an area where condensation does not
This unit
occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where
moisture forms on a cold surface when there
VCR
is an extreme change in temperature.
Condensation may cause internal damage to
the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from a
very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when
subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts
the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to
cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and may
cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
Please be aware that the performance of the optical pick-up assemby
may be adversely affected if the unit is exposed to nicotine smoke. If
replacement is required due to this reason it will not be covered within
the terms of warranty.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD may
become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket,
or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a
short time.)
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit adjust
to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until condensation is
gone.
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist
(Video) will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
6
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 7 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Remote Control Information/Unit Care/Disc care
Remote Control Information
About batteries
≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
Using the remote control
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of 7m
directly in front of the unit.
Remote control signal sensor
R6/LR6, AA
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period of
time. Store in a cool, dark place.
20
30
20
30
The distance and angles are an approximate.
Unit Care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions
that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing with pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be available for sale in all countries, e.g. not
available in Germany, please consult your Panasonic dealer for advice.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
This unit
DO NOT
The heat can damage the unit.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit.
Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited
material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥ A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
≥ A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
≥ A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
Disc Care
Holding a disc
Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting
oil from your fingers on the disc. Do not touch the signal surface of discs
(the shiny side).
Cleaning discs
Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation may
appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft, dry lint-free cloth in a straight
line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc.
Return discs to their cases when not in use; this helps to protect against
scratches and dirt.
Storing discs
≥Do not place or store discs in the following locations:
– Direct sunlight
– Very dusty or humid areas
– Near a heat source
– Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature (condensation
can occur)
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur
Discs to avoid
≥Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape
≥Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit, causing
improper operation or damage to the unit
≥Cracked discs
≥Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or labels, such
as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared-for discs that
were previously labeled or re-labeled)
7
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 8 ページ
Quick
Start
Guide
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Location of Parts/Controls
Remote Control
1 Turn the unit on or off ......................................................... (> 13)
2 Select drive [HDD, DVD] .............................................. (> 20, 21)
3 Select channels and title numbers etc./
Enter numbers..................................................................... (> 13)
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles,
timer programmes, still pictures or music ............... (> 23, 30, 53)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
PROG/CHECK
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching (> 41)
6 Show the digital channel information/Programme information within
GUIDE Plus+ screen/Show status messages/Show Properties
screen................................................................ (> 32, 44, 45, 46)
7 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR ......................................... (> 35, 37)
8 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame...................................... (> 13, 36)
9 Show OPTION menu
– for accessing Slideshow or Standby Settings, etc.
– for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc. (> 35, 39, 46, 48)
CHAPTER
SLOW SEARCH
SKIP
–
–
–
–
for showing advertisements (> 32)
for searching for programmes (> 34)
for showing Audio Description screen (> 44)
for Viewing the Top Menu of DVD-Video (> 20)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35, 38, 40)
for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 59)
for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 62)
for GUIDE Plus+ operations (> 32)
for deactivating timer programme (> 30)
for showing the Series Information screen (> 33)
for selecting programme category (> 29, 33, 44)
for editing Favourites (> 70)
: Use Colour buttons (Red, Green, Yellow, Blue) according to onscreen instructions.
STOP
STATUS
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
PLAY x1.3
EXIT
; Recording function
OK
RETURN
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
REC
[¥ REC]: Start recording .............................................................................. (> 21)
[REC MODE]: Change recording mode ........................................................ (> 21)
[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment...................... (> 28)
[¥ DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV Recording ................................................. (> 26)
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
TEXT
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
< DVB function
[TEXT
[STTL
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
]: Show Digital Teletext service..................................................... (> 44)
]: Show subtitles............................................................................ (> 44)
Transmission window
TV operations ..................................................................... (> 77)
Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ list ... (> 19, 21, 32)
Show timer recording list ..................................................... (> 29)
Input select (Tuner, AV1, AV2) ...................................... (> 19, 28)
Create chapters................................................................... (> 36)
Exit the menu screen
Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen ............................... (> 19, 22, 32)
Show FUNCTION MENU .................................................... (> 41)
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
Return to previous screen
Skip approx. +60s ............................................................. (> 36)
Skip approx. -10s .............................................................. (> 36)
Skip the specified time ........................................................ (> 36)
Show menu for disc playback etc./Change DVB multi audio........ (> 66)
Main Unit

Disc tray

The unit’s display

Pull to flip down
the front panel.

8
VQT2J34
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) ..................... (> 13)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode
or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
2 USB port ................................................... (> 18)
  
3
4
5
6
7
Remote control signal sensor
Disc tray open/close button....................... (> 20)
Channel Select button......................... (> 19, 21)
Start recording button................................ (> 21)
Stop button.......................................... (> 20, 21)
Play/a1.3 button ....................................... (> 20)
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 9 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分

HDD
DVD



D COPY USB
STEP 1
The Unit’s Display

EXT -L
REC
PLAY




6 Timer recording indicator .......................... (> 22)
1 Disc indicator
This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.
On:
When a Timer recording programme is registered
Flashes:
When the unit cannot go to Timer recording standby
2 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
3 Copying indicator
4 USB port indicator
5 Linked timer recordings with external equipment
indicator......................................................(> 28)
7 Drive [HDD, DVD] indicator
8 Main display section
Current time/playback counter, various messages
9 Remote control visual feedback
This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.
: Recording/Playback indicator
Rear Panel
RF
IN
VIDEO
DMR-EX773EB-K
VQ7AA01002 R
SER. NO.
AV1
(TV)
L
AV OUT
OPTICAL
R
RF
OUT
AUDIO
OUT

1
2
3
4




Aerial input terminal ...................... (> 10, 11, 78)
Aerial output terminal .................... (> 10, 11, 78)
AUDIO/VIDEO output terminals.......... (> 78, 79)
AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal ..... (> 10, 11, 78)
TV set connection
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
AV2
(EXT)





5 AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal .......... (> 11, 78)
Connection of an external unit
6 HDMI AV OUT terminal ....................... (> 12, 79)
Digital audio and video output terminal
7
8
9
:
Digital audio output terminal ......................(> 79)
Cooling fan
Serial number
AC IN~ = Power supply
Connection for the AC mains lead
21-pin Scart terminal
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
21
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
9
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 10 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Basic Connection
Use of the RF coaxial cable
≥ Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
≥ Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 42).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1” or “RGB 2” (> 75)
Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (> 75)
≥ Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Connecting to a Television only
TV
RF IN
To the aerial
AV
HDMI IN
2
The RF coaxial cable
cannot be used for
showing pictures from
the unit. The unit must
be connected using
another method, e.g.
21-pin Scart cable
to show pictures
from the unit on the
television set.
3
1
This unit
RF IN
RF OUT
AV1
(TV)
HDMI
AV OUT
HDMI cable
You can enjoy high-quality picture by
adding the HDMI cable connection > 12
1 Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the unit.
2 RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV.
3 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
10
VQT2J34
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite
Receiver
To the aerial
Digital satellite antenna
1
Digital satellite receiver
RF IN
TV
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
DISH INPUT
AV/VCR
HDMI IN
2
RF IN/AERIAL
AV
6
AV/TV
RF OUT
STEP 2
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 11 ページ
AV
5
This unit
RF IN
The RF coaxial cable cannot be
used for showing pictures from the
unit. The unit must be connected
using another method, e.g. 21-pin
Scart cable to show pictures from
the unit on the television set.
RF OUT
AV1(TV)
4
AV2 (EXT) HDMI AV OUT
3
HDMI cable
You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding
the HDMI cable connection > 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the digital satellite receiver.
RF coaxial cable from the “RF OUT” on the digital satellite receiver to the “RF IN” on the unit.
RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN/AERIAL” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/VCR” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV2 (EXT)” on the unit.
21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/TV” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV” on the TV.
To view digital satellite programmes
Refer to “Watching Digital Satellite Programmes” (> 19)
To record digital satellite programmes
Refer to “Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver or External equipment” (> 28)
Connecting AC mains lead (included)
Connect only after all other connections are complete.
This unit
AC IN
To household mains
socket
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even
when it is turned off.
[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]
After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (> 13).
Additional Connections
110, 78
11
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 12 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Basic Connection
≥ You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection
between this unit and your TV.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not
included)
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted, enabling
you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV
(High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥ This unit incorporates HDMI (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour gradation
(4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV.
A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not
support Deep Colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.
≥ Video sources converted to 1920t1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective
image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥ Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥ When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked
operations would be possible. [> 42, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥ It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
≥ Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
Digital Satellite receiver
TV
Connecting with a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
AV/VCR
HDMI IN
AV
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected,
the following functions are available.
≥ Direct TV Recording (> 26)
≥ Watching Digital Satellite
Programmes (> 19)
(In this case, make sure to switch
the television input to “AV”.)
AV1(TV)
AV2 (EXT)
This unit
HDMI
AV OUT
HDMI cable
21-pin Scart cable
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 73).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and set “HDMI Video
Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p” (> 75).
Notes
≥If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed
(> 92) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio
cannot be output).
12
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 13 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the mains for the television
(and connected equipment) and select
the appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥ These are the first settings you make
upon buying the unit. You don’t need to
make these settings again.
STEP 3
Setting the Channels and Clock
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
TV’s remote
control
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
1
DVB Auto Setup
to turn the unit on.
Scan
CH
27
27
27
27
DVB Auto Setup starts. The unit
will search for the digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about
5 minutes.
2
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
TV
9
Radio 9
Radio: 4
68
Quality
9
9
PROG/CHECK
DELETE
Searching...
Power Save in Standby
Power Save
From 0 :00
OK
STOP
On
To 6 :00
STATUS
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
PLAY x1.3
EXIT
Saves standby power consumption
by disabling Quick Start function and
AV2 loop-through in standby.
OK
RETURN
OK
Power Save in Standby
Activated
(On/On Timer)
Deactivated
(Off)
Power consumption
Quick Start*1
Approx. 0.3W*2
Deactivated
Approx. 11W
Activated
Turns off
(The clock display
disappears.)
Stays lit
Watching the picture from the digital
Cannot do
Can do
satellite receiver connected to the
AV2 terminal
§1 The unit could take over 1 minute to switch ON from standby mode with
Quick start deactivated. This time could be reduced to less than 10 seconds
with Quick start activated.
§2 When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (> 76)
When setup has completed, the confirmation screen appears.
RETURN
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
REC
The features of the “Power Save in Standby” function when the
unit is in standby mode are as below.
3
CHAPTER
SLOW SEARCH
SKIP
It will go into the
Power Save in
Standby mode when
the unit is in standby mode.
“On Timer”: Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time
and then press [OK].
≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during
the setting time period.
“Off”:
It is possible to start quickly from the standby
mode. (Quick Start mode)
Front display
INPUT
SELECT
Data: 0
RETURN
CHANGE
“On”:
Type
TV
TV
TV: 6
Power Save in Standby
Function:
3, 4 to select “On”, “On
Timer” or “Off”, then
CH 21
Channel Name
BBC ONE Wales
BBC 2W
TEXT
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Tips
To cancel Auto-Setup
Press [RETURN ].
If the unit displays “No stations found!”
Press [1] to select “No” and press [OK].
Go to step 2.
After you have performed steps 2–;, turn
off the unit and confirm the cable or aerial
input is connected to the RF IN terminal.
Restart the Auto-Setup again (> 71, DVB
Auto Setup by Signal Quality).
If the clock setting menu appears or the
clock is not correct, set the clock
manually (> 14).
Restarting the Auto-Setup (> 71, DVB
Auto Setup by Signal Quality)
OK
(continued on the next page)
To set the channel list best suited to your
region (> 71, DVB Auto Setup by
Region)
About the screen saver function
When this unit is not operated for
approximately 5 minutes while the screen is
being displayed, the screen saver may be
displayed.You can turn this function off
(> 74, Screen Saver).
13
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 14 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Setting the Channels and Clock
4
The Owner ID settings screen appears.
1 and press the numbered
buttons to enter your choice of a
4-digit PIN number.
Owner ID
PIN number Name
House No.
Clock Setting
This unit usually obtains time and date information from
digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time
several times a day.
However, if the clock is not set correctly, you can set it
manually as follws.
1
With the unit stopped
2
3, 4 to select “Others”, then
3
3, 4 to select “Setup”, then
4
5
3, 4 to select “Others”, then 1
6
3, 4 to select Automatic “Off”,
Postcode
RETURN
RETURN : leave
≥ Make a note of the PIN number (don’t
forget). Owner ID cannot be reset by
“Shipping Condition” in the setup menu.
(> 76)
5
6
OK
to store the PIN number.
2 to select “Yes”, then
OK
The cursor moves to “Name”.
7
1 to enter the name.
8
3, 4 to select a letter, then 1 to
move to next character.
3, 4 to select “Clock”, then
then
OK
OK
OK
OK
Repeat this to enter the name.
Clock
9
Automatic Off
OK
to store the name.
Time
0 : 00 : 00
Date
1 /
1 / 2010
Number
:
;
4 and 1 and then repeat steps
8, 9 to enter and store “House
No.” and “Postcode”.
– Auto-Setup for your unit is complete. You
can now choose your favourite channels
and store them in the required order in the
Favourites. (> 70)
Tips
To correct the PIN number
1.Press [2, 1] to select the digit.
2.Press the numbered buttons to enter the digit.
To correct the character
1 Press [2, 1] to select the character.
2 Press [3, 4] to correct the character.
To display the Owner ID information on TV
Press and hold [∫] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds.
The PIN number is not displayed.
After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.
VQT2J34
SELECT
Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
7
2, 1 to select the item you want
to change.
The items change as follows:
RETURN
The Owner ID settings screen disappears.
14
CHANGE
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
8
3, 4 to change the setting.
9
to confirm new date and
time and to initiate the clock.
:
You can also use the numbered buttons for
setting.
OK
RETURN
Tips
≥If the clock is set manually, the clock does not automatically correct
the time. We recommend you set “Automatic” in the Clock setting
menu to “On” in step 6 (> above).
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 15 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
HDD and Disc Handling
Data that can
be recorded
and played
Rewritable
Play on other
players§1
Hard disk
drive (HDD)
Video
Still picture
Music
≤
–
≤
≤
[HDD]
DVD-RAM
Video
Still picture
≤
≤
≤
≤
CPRM (> 92)
compatible discs
only.
[RAM]
DVD-R
Video§3
or
Still picture§3
–
≤
≤
–
DVD-R DL
Video
–
≤
≤
–
Disc type
Logo
Recording 16:9 Copy-once recording
(CPRM) (> 24)
aspect picture§2
Standard symbol
STEP 3
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Video only)
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
DVD-RW
Video
≤
≤
≤
–
+R
Video
–
≤
–(4:3 aspect)
–
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+R DL
Video
–
≤
–(4:3 aspect)
–
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+RW
Video
≤
≤
–(4:3 aspect)
–
[+RW]
≤: Can do, –: Cannot do
§1
§2
§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (> 69).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and
DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
For further information (> 24, Notes for Recording)
[-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (> 68).
≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu (> 69).
≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording Modes and Durations” (> 25).
≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent
you from playing or recording certain discs.
≥Please see specifications (> 94) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
Notes
≥[RAM] will show an increase in available space whenever a title has
been erased.
≥[-RW‹V›] and [+RW] discs will only show an increase in available
space when their last title has been erased.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The discs will show no increase in available
space after deleting titles.
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of
the recording.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double
DVD-R DL
When switching layers:
Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one
+R DL
Video and audio may momentarily cut
side. If there is not enough space on the first layer to record a
programme, the remainder is recorded on the second layer.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit
Second recordable layer
automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme.
The available space
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the
unit is switching layers.
First recordable layer
Title 2
Title 1
Playback direction
(Inner section of the disc)
(Outer section of the disc)
∫Recording Modes and Durations (> 25)
15
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 16 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
HDD and Disc Handling
Play-only Discs
Disc type
Logo
DVD-Video
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
Standard symbol
[DVD-V]
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-RW§ video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (> 68) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
MP3, JPEG
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with music recorded in MP3 (> 17)
≥DVD-R§ and DVD-R DL§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG (> 17)
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
[CD]
≥Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.
CD
MP3, JPEG
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with music recorded in MP3 (> 17)
≥CD-R§ and CD-RW§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG (> 17)
≥You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.
Video CD
[VCD]
≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)
SVCD
Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the
recording.
≥You can play still pictures (JPEG), MP3 format data recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/RW. You can also play CD-DA, Video CD and SVCD
(conforming to IEC62107) format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalise the disc after recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
§
Discs that Cannot be Played
≥ 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥ 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on
another unit and not finalised (> 92).
≥ Discs recorded with AVCHD format
≥ DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL
≥ DVD-Audio
≥ Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥ DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD,
CVD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD
≥ DVD-RAM with a cartridge (TYPE 1)
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for
the type of connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Disc/Titles
recorded on
HDD
Yes/No
PAL
≤
NTSC
≤
PAL
≤
NTSC
≤§1 (PAL60)
PAL
–
NTSC
≤§2
Multi-system TV
PAL TV
NTSC TV
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the
picture will not be shown correctly.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 74).
≥When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that
you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or NTSC)
(> 74).
§1
16
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 17 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
USB Memory Handling
USB memories you can use on this unit
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Compatible
USB
memories
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Format
Standard
symbol
[USB]
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Data that can be played or copied (> below)
File format
MP3
Still pictures (JPEG)
Playing
≤
≤
≤
≤
Copying to HDD
Instructions
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer
You can play still pictures recorded with a computer
onto the USB memory and copy them to HDD (> 37, onto the USB memory and copy them to HDD or DVD64).
RAM (> 38, 63).
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to
this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
MP3 File Information
Playable media
File format
Still Picture (JPEG§2) Information
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Playable media
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
File format
JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Compatible pixels
Between 34k34 and 6400k6400
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
Number of
folders§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
recognizable: 300 folders
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of
300 folders
Number of files§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1: 3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files
Number of folders Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)
(groups or albums) recognizable:
300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root
folder)
Number of files
(tracks)
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1:
3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
frequency
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags
compatible ([HDD] [USB])
Not supported
MOTION JPEG
PROGRESSIVE JPEG
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3 file,
play may not be possible.
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG and other
type of files is 4000.
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not display
or be playable.
17
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 18 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Inserting Disc/USB memory
Music files and Still Pictures
(JPEG)
Inserting Discs
Notes
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§compliant (Content recorded on a digital
camera, etc.)
§
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA)
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
– Insert a disc.
Insert label-up.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R
DL); however, reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a
lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums); some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
≥Images recorded at a very high resolution may take a long time to
display.
≥English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are displayed
correctly. Other characters may not display correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files (tracks)
and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order you number
them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be played.
Tips
You can play music files (MP3) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by
making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of
writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you number
the folders.
Structure of MP3 folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close tray.
Notes
≥ Ensure the disc is flat in the tray
≥ When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the
cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.
≥ [RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from
one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to
eject the disc and turn it over.
Automatic drive select function
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically switches
to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
Inserting/Removing the USB memory
Root
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order
you want to play them.
Inserting the USB memory
001 001 Group
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
002 Group
Order of play
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
003 Group
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
Structure of still pictures (folders)
≥Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that the data
stored therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is stopped, so the “USB device”
screen is displayed. Select an item, then press [OK] to switch to the
USB-related operations (> 37, 63).
Root
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
Files inside a folder are displayed in
the order they were updated or taken.
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX.jpg
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
Order of play
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
004 Folder
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
[RAM]
Folders can be created on other
equipment.
§
These folders cannot be
selected as a copying
destination.
≥If a folder name or file name has
been input using other equipment,
the name may not be displayed
properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
Root
XXXX.jpg
JPEG
DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX.jpg

DCIM
XXXXX
XXXX.jpg
18
VQT2J34
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may be
damaged.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 19 ページ
Basic
Operati
ons
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Watching Television
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system” (> 32) for detail information.
This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to directly receive and
record digital terrestrial channels.
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Important:
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
1
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
PAGE
to turn the unit on.
2
CH
AV
PROG CHECK
DELETE
TV Guide: Landscape
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
All Types
Sun 10th
All Channels
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
CHAPTER
SLOW SEARCH
SKIP
Time:
– The GUIDE Plus+ list
appears.
INPUT
SELECT
BBC 1
BBC 2
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
+24 hours
SELECT
RETURN
Prog. Type
3
3, 4 to select the current programme, then
4
3, 4 to select “View”, then
STOP
Category
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
PAUSE
PLAY x1.3
Page
Page
STATUS
PAUSE LIVE TV
EXIT
OK
OK
Selecting a Channel without the GUIDE Plus+ system
OK
RETURN
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
To select desired channel
Press [W X CH].
REC
To directly enter Channels
TEXT
You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.
e.g., “5”: [0] > [0] > [5] or [5] > [OK]
“15”: [0] > [1] > [5] or [1] >[5] > [OK]
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
Tips
≥Regarding Digital Channel Information (> 44)
≥If New Channel Message appears (> 45)
≥To select Audio Description, Digital Teletext and subtitles (> 44)
≥To change DVB Multi Audio (> 67, DVB Multi Audio)
Notes
≥The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done.
Watching Digital Satellite Programmes
You can view the digital satellite programmes via this unit by the following
method when “Power Save in Standby” is activated, and the digital
satellite receiver is not connected to TV.
Preparation:
≥ Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2 input terminals
(> 11).
≥ Turn on the digital satellite receiver.
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥When “Power Save in Standby” is
deactivated (> 76), you can watch the
digital satellite programme without
turning the unit on.
Notes
≥You cannot watch digital satellite
programmes during timer recording.
1
2
Tips
to turn the unit on.
INPUT
SELECT
to select “AV2”.
19
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 20 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Playback
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
VOL
Refer to “Advanced Playback” (> 35–36) for detail information.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]
1
PAGE
to turn the unit on.
2
DRIVE
SELECT
3
If you selected the DVD drive
PROG/CHECK
to select the HDD or DVD drive.
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SLOW SEARCH
SKIP
STOP
– Insert a disc (> 18) and press [< OPEN/CLOSE] again to close
the tray.
STATUS
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
EXIT
OK
Press [∫].
– The stopped position is memorized. (Resume play function)
– (Expect for [HDD]) The stopped position is cleared when you press [∫]
several times.
RETURN
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
Pausing Play
Press [;].
– Press again to restart play.
REC
[DVD-V] [VCD]
DINOSAUR
Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as
follows: e. g.,
DVDTOP MENU
Play
Chapter List
[DVD-V]
3, 4, 2, 1 to select an item, then
OK
You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item.
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select an item.
e.g., “5”:
>
To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1.Press [OPTION].
2.Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Menu” and press [OK].
[VCD]
Press [RETURN
].
Notes
Subtitles
Trailer
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Tips
Menu Screens on the TV
VQT2J34
PLAY x1.3
PLAY x1.3
Stopping Play
20
CHAPTER
to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).
OPEN/CLOSE
4
CH
AV
, “15”:
>
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Playback starts from the most recent
recording.
≥[DVD-V] [VCD]
Playback starts from the point specified by
the disc.
≥[CD]
Playback starts from the beginning of the
disc.
≥Depending on the disc type, playing may
automatically start without pressing
[1] (PLAY).
≥The unit takes some time to read the disc
before play starts.
≥DISCS CONTINUE TO ROTATE WHILE
MENUS ARE DISPLAYED.
Press [∫] when you finish to preserve the
unit’s motor and your television screen.
≥If “$” appears on the TV, the operation is
prohibited by the unit or disc.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 21 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Recording Television Programmes
Refer to “Notes for Recording” (> 24) and “Advanced Recording” (> 25–
27) for detail information on recording.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 68).
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
1
2
to turn the unit on.
DRIVE
SELECT
PROG/CHECK
to select the HDD or DVD drive.
DELETE
3
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] If you selected the DVD drive
OPEN/CLOSE
to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).
STOP
STATUS
4
to select desired channel.
HDD
REC MODE
to select the recording
mode. (> 25)
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
PLAY x1.3
EXIT
D
– To select with the numbered buttons (> 19).
– When no channel setting is performed on the unit and broadcast
is recorded directly from the digital satellite receiver, select a
channel on the connected equipment, then press
[INPUT SELECT] to select “AV2”.
5
CHAPTER
SLOW SEARCH
SKIP
– Insert a disc with enough remaining blank space and press
[< OPEN/CLOSE] again to close the tray.
– When the format confirmation screen is displayed (> 26).
CH
INPUT
SELECT
OK
RETURN
OPTION
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
Recording Mode
Rec Mode
Remain
XP
47:47
SP
95:34
LP
191:11
EP
381:16
REC
TEXT
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
STTL
DISPLAY TIME SLIP
SELECT
6
REC
to start recording.
HDD
REC
Elapsed recording time
Pausing Recording
Press [;].
– Press again to restart recording.(The title is not divided.)
Stopping Recording
Press [∫].
Tips
≥If a programme to record has subtitles, Audio Description or multiple audio, you can record
with these items. They cannot be switched after recording.
– To record with subtitles
Before starting the recording, show the subtitles (> 44). If the programme has multiple
subtitle, select the desired language (> 71).
– To record with Audio Description
Before starting the recording, turn on the Audio Description and set the volume (> 44).
– To record with the selected audio
Before starting the recording, select the desired audio channel or language, if the
programme has multiple audio channel or language (> 67, 71).
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 73)
Notes
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [-R] [+RW] To use a new disc,
formatting is necessary. (> 26, 68)
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30
seconds for the unit to complete recording
management information after recording
finishes.
≥You cannot change the channel or
recording mode during recording.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to
discs that already have PAL signal
recordings. (However, both types of
programmes can be recorded onto the
HDD.)
≥[-R] Video cannot be recorded to DVD-R
discs with JPEG images already recorded
on them.
≥Depending on the type of disc used for
recording or the type of broadcast, there
may be restrictions on the title you are
trying to record. (> 24)
21
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 22 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Timer Recording
What is FREEVIEW+TM?
FREEVIEW+ is the functions that enable timer recordings to be controlled by the signal sent
from the broadcaster. “Guide Link”, “Series recording” (> 33), and “Split Programme” are
available.
TV
“Guide Link” – If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop
times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start.
This is indicated by “Guide Link” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (> below).
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
“Split Programme” – If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by some other
programmes e.g. news, this unit pauses recording during the gap.
This is indicated by “Split” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (> below).
When setting timer from the 1st split programme, other parts of the programme will be
automatically set and indicated by the timer mark on the TV Guide, but not shown on the
timer recording list.
PAGE
PROG/CHECK
If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop times are
controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. If the signal is not sent correctly,
the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes.
In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend you set the
start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10
minutes for Guide Link to function.
e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at 10:00 and end
at 11:00, set “9:58” and “11:05” in step 3 (> below).
DELETE
STOP
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥ Turn on this unit.
≥ If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you use for recording (> 15).
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 68).
≥ Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the correct time.
STATUS
OPTION
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the future programme,
OK
Timer
Recording
TV Guide: Landscape
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
Sun 10th
All Types
All Channels
2 BBC 2
Holiday Programme
Time:
Channel
Channel 4
Channel 5
RETURN
+24 hours
DVD 1:58 SP
30:24 SP
SUN 10/10/10 19:45:00
Date
Start
Stop HDD Mode STTL AD
View
DVD
22:30
SingleHDD
Timer Rec SP OFF OFF
Series Timer Rec
Delete
Programme Name
Press OK to store the programme.
2
TIMER REC
HDD
Selection screen
The West Tonight
2 BBC 2 10/10 SUN 20:30
3 TV
All &Channels
News
Factual : BBC 2
Holiday Programme
TUE
14.10.08
(Guide
Link)
18:00࡯18:30
BBC 1
BBC 2
-24 hours
Remain
TUE 14.10.08 12:54:00
Prog. Type
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Series Info
Category
OK
OK
Page
 DELETE
0
--
9
Number
RETURN
RETURN
Page
“Guide Link”, “Split” and “Series” are displayed here.
– If “Selection Screen” appears, press [3, 4] to select “Single Timer Rec.”, then
press [OK]. Refer to “Series recording” (> 33) for “Series Timer Rec.”.
3
Confirm the programme
(start and end time) by TV
magazine, etc. and correct if
necessary using
3, 4, 2, 1 then
y

Timer icon
OK
– The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
– The timer icon is displayed.
– “F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been
activated.
– Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
– Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
22
VQT2J34
≥“Guide Link” will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions.
– Timer programmes set manually (> 29).
– Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time
changed by more than 10 minutes from original time.
(Series): Series recording (> 33) is set.
(Split):
The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes. This
unit pauses recording during the gap between the parts of the
programme.
CHAPTER
SLOW SEARCH
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
PLAY x1.3
EXIT
OK
1
then
INPUT
SELECT
SKIP
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
2
CH
AV
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
Tips
≥To check programmes (> 30)
≥To cancel a timer recording
programming
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme (the timer icon is
displayed) and press [OK].
2 While “Delete” is selected, press
[OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
– The timer icon disappears.
≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode
only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to
“LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 73)
Notes
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new disc,
formatting is necessary. (> 26, 68)
≥The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed
immediately after initial tuning is done.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system will not work if
the clock is not set correctly.
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV
System” (> 74), the GUIDE Plus+ system
cannot be used.
≥“FR” recording mode is not available when
the timer programme is controlled by
“Guide Link”.
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system
data is only possible via the aerial input of
this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data
via externally connected satellite receivers
is not possible.
≥If you set a timer recording that will overlap
with other timer recordings, the
“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen
appears to help you resolve the
overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
≥Simultanious recording to HDD and DVD
is not possible.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 23 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Deleting Titles
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 68).
≥ If deleting titles from a disc, insert the disc containing the programme to
be deleted.
Important:
Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
TV
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
DELETE Navigator
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
PROG/CHECK
1
2
DRIVE
SELECT
to select the HDD or DVD drive.
DELETE
INPUT
SELECT
SLOW SEARCH
SKIP
With the unit stopped
CHAPTER
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Video
Picture
Music
Recording
Delete
STOP
Copy
PAUSE
PLAY x1.3
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
STATUS
OK
PAUSE LIVE TV
EXIT
RETURN
3
3, 4 to select “Delete”, then
4
3, 4 to select “Video”, then
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
DELETE Navigator
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
OK
OK
OK
VIDEO
PICTURE
OPTION
MUSIC
RETURN
MANUAL SKIP
-10s
+60s
2
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Previous
OK
RETURN
OK
RETURN
5
OPTION
Select
Info
REC
Next
Page 02/02
Previous
Next
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title, then
PAUSE
PAUSE LIVE TV
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
Press [;] again to cancel.
6
7
OK
2 to select “Delete”, then
REC MODE EXT LINK DIRECT TV REC
Notes
≥You cannot delete while recording or
copying.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Even if you have set
protection on other equipment, such titles
are deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]DL] It is not
possible to delete contents from finalised
discs.
Tips
OK
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Deleting Titles During Playback
≥[HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item increases the
available disc space by the amount of
space taken by the item deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space
does not increase after deletion.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space
increases when you delete the last title.
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total
disc space, the disc needs to be
formatted. (> 68)
≥[HDD] You can press [STATUS ] to
display the “Properties” screen when a title
with “ Info” on the bottom of the All Titles
or Grouped Titles screen is selected.
(> 49)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
1
During playback
2
2 to select “Delete”, then
DELETE
OK
23
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 24 ページ
Advanc
ed
Featur
es
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Notes for Recording
Broadcast in multi-channel sound:
Selecting
audio for
recording
About the
aspect when
recording a
programme
When you
want to copy
titles in high
speed mode
from the HDD
to DVD-R,
etc.
You can select audio language when received audio in multichannel broadcast (“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of digital
channel information display).
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you
want to record in “DVB Multi
Audio” in the on-screen
display (> 67).
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Recording Format” is set to “Video format”)
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
The original aspect used for the source programme will also be
used with the recording.
However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in
4:3.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded in 4:3
aspect.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Recording Format” is set to
“VR format”)
The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect.
[+R] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “Video format”. > 72)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings (> above) are
necessary before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
Record to the HDD
HDD
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or 8
cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (> 92) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
Copy-once
recording
12 cm
[HDD]
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

–—
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a Playlist (Video) created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (> 69).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them in
the same way as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record
or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Playing the
disc on other
DVD players
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CHG
SEARCH
ENTER
L
VO
AY
TOP
MEN
U
DISPL
RETURN
MENU
ON
OFF
 /I
DC
Finalise
IN

DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5




/

/
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
 OPEN/CLOSE
9V
OPEN
D
ROUN
A.SUR
TOR
MONI
MOD
AT
REPE
E
MODE
PICTURE
[+RW]
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 69). However, even with Top
Menu, +RW may not play on other players.
Recording to
DVD-R DL
and +R DL
24
VQT2J34
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 25 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Advanced Recording
Recording Modes and Durations
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this table are an estimate.)
DVD-RAM
Single-sided
(4.7 GB)
Doublesided§1
(9.4 GB)
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)
35 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45
minutes
1 hour 45
minutes
SP
(Standard play)
70 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
3 hours 35
minutes
3 hours 35
minutes
LP
(Long play)
140 hours
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
7 hours 10
minutes
7 hours 10
minutes
16 (12§2)
hours
8 (6 ) hours
14 hours 20
minutes
(10 hours 45
minutes§2)
16 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20
minutes
Recording
Mode
HDD
(160 GB)
XP
(High quality)
EP
(Extra long
play)§4
279 hours
8 (6§2) hours
(209 hours§2)
FR
(Flexible
Recording)§4
§1
§2
§3
§4
279 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other.
When “Recording time in EP mode” has been set to “EP ( 6hours )”
in the Setup menu (> 72).
The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6hours )” than when
using “EP ( 8hours )”.
You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this
unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” mode.
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or
longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or
+RW discs.
XP
SP
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
Approximately
9 hours with
video quality
equivalent to LP
mode.
Tips
≥Maximum number of titles to a disc
[HDD] 499 titles on HDD
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] 99 titles on a disc
[+R] [+RW] 49 titles on a disc
≥FR (Flexible recording mode)
Using “Flexible Recording” is convenient in these kinds of situations:
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
– When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
– When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
– When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be copied
to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space
e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc:
− If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit on one disc.
LP
EP (6hours)
§2
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
2
A second disc is necessary for
30-minutes of the programme.
EP (8hours)
− If you select SP mode, the programme will fit on one disc.
Notes
≥This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the
amount of data recorded to suit the picture quality, so actual recording
times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be
different. ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] The difference will be especially noticeable.)
Use a disc enough remaining blank space.
≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP ( 8hours ) mode, play may not
be possible on DVD players, even if they are compatible with DVDRAM. In this case use EP ( 6hours ) mode.
However there will be 30-minutes
remaining disc space.
− If you select “Flexible Recording” the programme will fit on
one disc perfectly.
You can set FR mode when programming timer recordings and flexible
recording (> 27).
25
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 26 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Advanced Recording
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVDRAM recordable on recording equipment.
Important:
Formatting permanently deletes all disc contents
(including the contents that have been recorded on a
PC), regardless of protection status of disc.
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Counter (Cancel) __#OFF0:30__#OFF1:00
SELECT
OK
Refer to “Formatting Discs” (> 68) for more detail of formatting.
When removing a Recorded or Copied
Disc
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note : Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other
Finalising
DVD players without finalising.
DVD-R, etc. recorded or
copied on this unit cannot be
played on other players immediately after recording or
copying. Using the Finalise feature allows you to play
these discs on other players.
Once the disc is Finalised you will no longer be able to
record onto the disc.
[However if you format the DVD-RW, you can record and
copy onto the disc again. (> 68)]
to start finalising.
or
to eject the disc without
finalising.
Notes
≥You cannot stop finalising once you have started it.
Tips
≥If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” (> 68), “Auto-Play Select” (> 69) or “Top Menu”
(> 69) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
≥Refer to “Finalising” (> 69) for more detail of finalising.
26
VQT2J34
OFF4:00
v
OFF1:30
^___ OFF3:00 (_ OFF2:00 (_--b
Notes
OK
Tips
OPEN/CLOSE
:
RETURN
Do not format if you intend to view pre-recorded titles or
contents from the disc.
REC
During recording
On the main unit only
– The recording time and the unit’s display changes as
follows:
Only format the disc if you
intend to use it for recording.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
After recording or copying, if
you press [< OPEN/CLOSE]
to eject the disc, the following
screen may appear.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
This function allows specifying the length of recording
time up to 4 hours.
repeatedly until the desired time
is reached.
The following screen may
appear when inserting a new
disc or a disc that has been
recorded on another
equipment.
2 to select “Yes”, then
Specifying the Recording Time
— One Touch Recording
≥This function does not work during timer recording or Flexible
Recording.
≥Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [∫].
≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated for
approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording, if
“Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup menu. (Default
setting: “On”) (> 76)
Direct TV Recording
[HDD]
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV without
having to change the channels on this unit.
You can use the function when you connect the unit to a
Q Link compatible TV using a 21-pin Scart cable.
You can also use this function using VIERA Link. (> 42)
DIRECT TV REC
Press and hold for about 1
second.
– The titles are recorded to the HDD.
Tips
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Notes
≥When the Digital Teletext (> 44) is displayed, Direct TV recording is
unavailable.
≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording, the Direct
TV recording stops.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 28), Direct TV recording
is unavailable.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 27 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the
programme within the remaining disc space.
The recording mode becomes FR mode. Refer to “FR
(Flexible recording mode)” (> 25).
Preparation:
≥ Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
1
With the unit stopped
Chasing Playback
[HDD] [RAM]
Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are
recording.
During recording
PLAY x1.3
Tips
To stop play
Press [∫] once.
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
2
3, 4 to select “Others”, then
3
3, 4 to select “Flexible Rec”, then
OK
OK
Flexible Rec
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time
Set rec. time
Start
8 hour 00 min.
8 hour 00 min.
Cancel
SELECT
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops,
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording”, then press [OK].
Simultaneous Record and Playback
[HDD] [RAM]
Allows playback of a previous title, while recording
something else.
≥ You can also change the drive and play while
recording. Press [DRIVE SELECT].
1
During recording
2
[3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title to
RETURN
4
2, 1 to select “hour” and “min.”
and 3, 4 to set the recording
time.
– You can set “hour” and “min.” using the
numbered buttons.
5
play, then
When you want to start recording
3, 4, 2, 1 to select “Start”, then
OK
Tips
OK
– Recording starts.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Notes
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
Tips
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
To stop recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2 Press [∫].
3 If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press [2, 1] to
select “Yes” or “Stop Recording” and press [OK] to stop recording.
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining recording time
Press [STATUS ] to show the remaining recording time.
HDD
REC 0:59
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
Notes
≥During playing while you are recording, you cannot edit or delete titles.
Remaining time
27
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 28 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver or External equipment
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Manual Recording
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 68).
≥ Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2
input terminals (> 11).
≥ Set the “AV2 Input” to match the connected
equipment in the Setup menu (> 75).
≥ When the output signal from the external equipment
is NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (> 74).
1
With the unit stopped
INPUT
SELECT
to select “AV2” for the digital
satellite receiver you have
connected.
2
DRIVE
SELECT
to select the HDD or DVD
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver) — EXT LINK
To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver using timer programming
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection
(> 68).
≥ Make sure you connect the AV2 terminal of this unit to
“VCR Scart Terminal” of a SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver with a 21-pin scart cable (> 11).
≥ Set the “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” to match the
connected equipment in the Setup menu (> 75).
1
– Refer to the equipment’s operating
instructions.
2
to select the recording
3
5
Select the channel on the digital
satellite receiver.
REC
to start recording.
Tips
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Notes
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL
signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be
recorded onto the HDD).
28
VQT2J34
EXT LINK
– The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the
unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
– While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or
recording, most operations on this unit are
prohibited ([< OPEN/CLOSE], [Í/I] etc.).
mode.
4
to select the HDD or DVD
– If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc
(> 18).
– If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc
(> 18).
REC MODE
DRIVE
SELECT
drive.
drive.
3
Make timer programming on SKY
Digital STB/digital satellite receiver.
Tips
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording
standby (The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Manual timer recordings (> 29)
Notes
≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel
the setting after recording is finished.
≥This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (> 74).
≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some
cases.
≥.When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time
of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer
recording are close to each other.
[HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 47).
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s
display), the TV Guide cannot be downloaded.
≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1 output
terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input terminal
irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (> 75).
≥During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only
available from the drive performing the recording.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is
unavailable.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 29 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Advanced Timer Recording
Manual timer recordings
4
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input
to suit the connections to this unit.
≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 68).
≥ When recording to a disc, insert a disc with enough
remaining blank space.
≥ Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the
correct time.
≥ If connected via a digital satellite receiver, please ensure
before a timer recording starts the required channel is set
on the digital satellite receiver.
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
DVD 1:58 SP
SUN 10/10/10 12:53:00
Drive
No. Channel Date Start Stop HDD
DVD Mode STTL AD space
New Timer Programme
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
RETURN
OK
HDD 30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00
Start
Programme Name
Please set Channel.
OK
RETURN
Change
Category
0
--
9
Number
Channel:
– TV Station Name/External Input
≥When recording digital satellite programmes, select “AV2”.
≥You can press the “Blue” button to change the category. [e.g.,
Free Channels, Radio, Registered Favourites (> 70, Favourites
Edit)]
Date:
– You can set a daily or weekly programme (> right, Tips).
Start (start time)/Stop (end time):
– Hold button to change in 30-minute increments or decrements.
Drive:
– HDD or DVD
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”
(> 31).
Mode:
– Recording mode (> 25)
STTL [Subtitles (> 44)]§1, §2:
– AUTO/OFF
MON-SAT
SUN
All Channels : -----
SUN-SAT
SAT
Stop HDD Mode STTL AD
DVD
-- / -- --- -- : -- -- : -- --SP --- --Date
Channel
Remain
Timer
Recording
≥“Date” Setting
Each press of [3] changes items in the order below.
(Each press of [4] changes items in the reverse order.)
Current date One month later
minus one day
---
2, 1 to move
through the
items and
3, 4 to set
the items.
≥“F” on the unit’s display flashes when the unit cannot go to timer
recording standby.
≥If two timer recording times overlap, the first recording always has
priority. The second recording will start only after the first recording
has finished.
≥Recorded subtitles cannot be deleted later.
≥A timer recording will not start while a disc is being formatted, deleted
or finalised. The recording begins afterwards.
≥When “Channel” is set in “AV1”, “AV2” or “STTL” and “AD” setting is
unavailable.
≥Recorded Audio Description cannot be deleted.
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
≥ If “New Timer Programme” is already selected,
press [OK].
3
Notes
Tips
3, 4 to select “New Timer
Programme”, then
BBC 1 15
– “F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer
recording standby has been activated.
– Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
– Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
2
No. Channel
 01
Timer
Recording
– The timer icon is displayed in the left column.
1
PROG CHECK
OK
MON-FRI
Weekly timer Daily timer
Titles recorded using the same daily, weekly or series timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen (> 35) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.
≥You can also use the numbered buttons to enter “Channel”, “Date”,
“Start” and “Stop”.
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to switch the drive, [REC MODE] to
switch “Mode” and press [STTL
] to switch “STTL”.
Language for broadcast with multi-audio
or multi-subtitle
In timer recording of broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle,
audio and subtitle language to be recorded will follow the setting
of “DVB Preferred Multi Audio” and “DVB Preferred Subtitles” in
the Setup menu (> 71)
To cancel a timer recording in progress
Preparation:
≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input
to suit the connections to this unit.
AD [Audio Description (> 44)]§1, §3:
– AUTO/OFF
RENEW ([HDD]):
– Auto Renewal Recording (> 31) ON/OFF
1
While the unit is on
STOP
Programme Name:
Press [OK] (> 45, Entering Text).
§1
§2
§3
If “AUTO” is selected, and if the programme includes the information
of subtitles or Audio Description, they are automatically recorded
with the programme.
When there are multiple languages, select the subtitle language.
(> 71, DVB Preferred Subtitles)
You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during
timer recording.
– Confirmation screen appears.
2
2 to select “Stop Recording”, then
OK
Notes
≥Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted. (Daily,
weekly and series timer programmes remain and timer recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.)
29
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 30 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Advanced Timer Recording
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording”
screen appears
2a
If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other
timer recordings using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the
“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help
you eliminate the overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2b
then
2c
then 3, 4 to select the
programme.
Timer
Recording

Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
OK
to modify the programme.
3, 4, 2, 1 to make changes,
The timer recording list can be viewed even when the unit
is off.
PROG CHECK
to delete.
– You cannot delete programmes that are
currently recording.
Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or
Resolve Overlapping
1
DELETE
OK
When a programme with
is selected
OK
– If the programme was set from the TV Guide,
the available repeat programmes are
displayed. Press [3, 4] to select, then press
[OK].
– If the on-screen instructions do not appear,
change or delete the overlapped programme.
DVD 1:58 SP
SUN 10 /10/10 12:54:00
Drive
No. Channel Date Start Stop HDD
DVD Mode STTL AD space
New Timer Programme

Tips

Press OK to store new programme.
OK
RETURN
A Timer Recording screen icons
F:
μ:
Timer programme is active.
Currently recording
: Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme
with the later start time starts when the earlier programme
finishes recording.
: You stopped a daily, weekly or series timer recording. The
icon disappears the next time the timer recording starts
recording.
: The disc was full. (not enough space)
:
X:
:
The TV programme may not be recorded due to copyprotect.
Recording stopped (Dirty disc, etc.)
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (> 31).
:
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (Displayed while
recording.)
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
B Drive space
OK:
Recordable
> (Date): For daily or weekly timer recordings, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to one
month ahead from the present time) based on the
time remaining on the disc.
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
– the disc is write-protected.
– there is no more space left.
– the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
– programmes are overlapped.
– the timer programme is deactivated.
Relief:
Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the
HDD.
C Channel name, programme name and other
information are displayed.
30
VQT2J34
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes a month in advance.
You can also delete a programme with the following steps.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Notes
≥Recording may fail if there are changes to the station’s programming.
≥“F” disappears from the unit’s display when no timer programme is
set or when all timer programmes are deactivated.
≥“-------” is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no
episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you delete
the “-------” item after you confirm the last episode of the series is
recorded.
≥The “Guide Link” function may not work if you manually change the
start/end time by over 10 minutes.
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer recording
list at 4 a.m. two days later.
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer
programming)
After performing step 1 (> left)
2
(Red)
– “F” (> left) disappears from the timer
recording list.
– Press the “Red” button again to activate timer
programme.
Tips
You can deactivate the timer programme in the following
procedure as well.
Perform step 1 (> left)
1 Press [OPTION]
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Timer Off”, then press [OK].
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 31 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Relief Recording
Making timer recordings on the television
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not
enough remaining blank space, recording automatically
switches to the “HDD”. If there is no disc in the tray or the
disc cannot be recorded on or when timer recording
starts while copying, the recording drive will be altered to
the HDD.
≥ The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes
were relief-recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (> 35).
≥ If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as
much of the programme as possible will be recorded
onto the HDD.
[HDD]
To make a timer recording with your television, connect to
a television with a Q Link function (> 42) that you can
use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable (> 10,11).
1
Make timer programming on the
TV.
2
to turn the unit off.
– The start and end of recording is controlled by
TV.
– The titles are recorded to the HDD.
Auto Renewal Recording
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly
everyday or every week using timer recording, or if you
record a programme of series onto HDD repeatedly using
Series timer recording, the unit will record the new
programme over the old one.
This function can be used only when daily, weekly or
series timer recording is selected.
1
PROG CHECK
2
3, 4 to select the programme,
then
3
4
3, 4 to select “ON”, then
Remain
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Notes
≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display
lights), recording from TV does not start.
≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time
of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer
recording are close to each other.
To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 47).
Notes on timer recording
OK
2, 1 to select “RENEW” column.
Timer
Recording
Tips
HDD 30:24 SP
OK
DVD 1:58 SP
SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00
HDD
Channel Date Start Stop
AD RENEW
DVD Mode STTL
ON
1 BBC 1 SUN 22:00 22:30 HDD SP OFF OFF
All Channels : BBC 1
Programme Name
Notes
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or while
play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists (Video) made from programmes that were set for Auto
Renewal Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may not
be recorded completely.
≥When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a
different TV system (PAL/NTSC) cannot be played unless the TV
system is changed in the Setup menu (> 74) or the timer recording
has completed or has been cancelled.
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is turned
on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (> 56).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains turned
on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically. You can
turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at the
beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
31
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 32 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
GUIDE Plus+ system
What is the GUIDE Plus+ system?
The GUIDE Plus+ system gives you an overview of digital television and radio programmes up to 7 days in advance.
For many of these programmes, you can select additional information provided by the stations. You can search the
programme preview according to various topics such as sport, films etc., according to categories such as TV or
radio. Also, you can search for programmes using programme information such as programme names etc. You can
easily find the desired programmes and set Timer recording.
Logo of the Gemstar branding partner
Landscape view
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
The Gemstar branding
partner will supply the
rating information in the
programme information
and the recommended
group in the Prog.Type list.
RadioTimes
TV Guide: Landscape
Broadcast date
All Types
Sun 10th
10 Channel 4+1
All Channels
Channel 4 News
Time:
BBC 1
Advertisement

BBC 2
Channel 4
Channel 5
Timer icon
(> 22)
TIMER REC
RETURN
Channel 4 News

2
-24 hours
Hollyoaks
+24 hours
Prog. Type
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Portrait view:
This is convenient to narrow down
channels to search for the programme
you want to watch.
Category
Page
Page
Selected
programme
RadioTimes
TV Guide: Portrait
Sun 10th
10 Channel 4+1
Channel 4
More 4
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
19:30
20:00
21:00
22:00
23:00
00:05
00:10
-24 hours
Portrait view
Landscape view:
The GUIDE Plus+ system offers
detailed information as if you see a TV
programme magazine.
This is convenient to check the status of
Timer recording.
TIMER REC
RETURN
20:00
21:00
22:00
23:00
00:05
00:10
01:00
≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ data via
externally connected digital satellite receivers is not possible.
≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not set
correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.
ITV 4
E4
Hollyoaks
Channel 4 News
How to Look Good Naked
The Secret Millionaire
Love Trap
3 Minute Wonder
Trial and Error
Category
Prog. Type
+24 hours
Landscape view
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for this
channel.
To view a programme list ≥Jump ahead 24 hours
for another day
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be
viewed.
To change the page of
Press [W X CH].
the GUIDE Plus+ list
To see programme
Press [STATUS ].
information (programme ≥Press [3] and [4] to scroll up and
name, programme
down.
duration, broadcast
To show other pages
time, description, etc.)
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH]
(Next).
(Programmes with the
To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list
symbol)
Press [STATUS ].
To return to the previous Press [RETURN ].
screen
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
All Channels
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list
To change channels
All Types
To switch between Landscape view
and Portrait view
Press [GUIDE].
Page
Page
View advertisement
Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time (> 76,
Post Code) and leave the unit in standby over night to capture the
information.
If you have already entered your postcode in Owner ID (> 13), you do
not have to enter again.
If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcodes are
entered, advertisement may not be displayed correctly.
To display advertisement information
1 Press [OPTION].§
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].
While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter Words”
screen is displayed. (> 34, Searching by entering words)
≥To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the
information.
≥To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in
standby mode over night.
To change advertisements
Press [3, 4].
To return to TV Guide
Press [RETURN ].
§
Notes
≥Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set the
timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
≥The information from the GUIDE Plus+ system will not be lost even if
the unit is turned off at the mains outlet.
Tips
When the unit displays “No Data” or the empty GUIDE Plus+ list:
TV Guide: Landscape
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
All Types
Sun 10th
All Channels
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
The “empty” field
Channel 4
Channel 5
2
32
VQT2J34
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually (> 29, Manual timer recordings).
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 33 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Series recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just
one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.
1
This function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list sorted
by programme type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or category (e.g.
Free Channels, Radio).
1
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the series
programme, then OK
2
Selecting the programme from the desired
programme type or category
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
e
2a
to display the
list of programme
type.
(Yellow)
3, 4 to select “Series Timer
Rec.”, then OK
3
– If the same episode has already been set for
series timer recording at a different time or on
another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will not
be selectable.
Selection Screen
Timer
Recording
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
View
Holiday Programme
Single Timer Rec.
2 BBC 2
News
Sun 10/10/10
20:30࡯22:30
DVD 1:58 SP
SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00
Sun 10/10/10 12:54
Channel
Date
HDD
Start Stop DVD Mode STTL AD RENEW
SP OFF OFF OFF
2 BBC 2 18/ 8 TUE 20:30 22:30 HDD
Series Timer Rec.
Delete
All Channels : BBC 2
Holiday Programme
(Guide Link) (Series)
Programme Name
Press OK to store the programme.
Series Info
OK
OK
RETURN
4
2b
to display the
list of categories.
(Blue)
3
4
Type
Category
All Types
All Types
Movie
News
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Education
Lifestyle
Drama
All Channels
All Channels
Free Channels
Radio
Data
Favourite 1
Favourite 2
Favourite 3
Favourite 4
3, 4 to select the desired item.
OK
 DELETE
RETURN
– A list appears with all programmes of the
selected item.
– When you select the landscape view, the
programmes that belong to the selected
programme type are highlighted.
OK
– You cannot change “Channel” and “Date”.With
“Start” and “Stop” automatically set by the
“Guide Link” function, “Start” can be changed
back by up to 10 minutes and “Stop”can be
changed forward by up to 10 minutes.
– This unit automatically records the
programmes that are identified to be of the
same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.
– Titles recorded using series recording are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 35) except
when using Auto Renewal Recording.
y
TV Guide: Landscape
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
News
Sun 10th
All Channels
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
e. g.,
Programme type,
“News” is
selected in step
3 of Landscape
view.
Channel 4
Channel 5

2
+24 hours
SELECT
RETURN
5
Prog. Type
OPTION: Select Advert, etc.
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Category
Page
Page
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the
programme.
After searching > 34, Tips in “Searching using
programme information of titles recorded to the
HDD”
[S]
Series recording icon
Notes
Tips
To check the schedule of the series
Press the “Blue” button after performing steps 1 – 2 (> above).
Series Information
Sun 10/10/10 10:35
Name
Date
Contents

BBC2
10/10 Sun
21:30-22:30
Decameron 1
S
BBC2
25/08 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 2
S
BBC2
01/09 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 3
S
BBC2
08/09 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 4
BBC2
15/09 Tue
21:30-22:30
Decameron 1
S
R
R
: The episode to be recorded
: Repeat programme
Notes
≥“Series Timer Rec” will only be available when broadcaster is sending
series link information.
≥If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat
programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the
repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.
≥The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode of
the series for 13 weeks.
≥The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas. This
function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from broadcast
stations is correct.
≥The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found a
digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This process
can take a while depending on the particular station.
≥The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the
background when the unit is turned on. That means that the
programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.
Tips
To return to the previous GUIDE Plus+ list before you have
selected the programme type or categories
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the
categories in step 3. (> above)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
33
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 34 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
GUIDE Plus+ system
Searching for the programme from the
GUIDE Plus+ list
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1
Searching by entering words
During play or while stopped
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
By entering words, you can search for programmes from
the GUIDE Plus+ list using the programme information.
10/10
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11/10
Dolphins
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
2
1
Previous
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
2
OPTION
OK
RETURN
3
4
Entry method > 45, Entering Text
5
TV Guide: Portrait
Sun 10/10/10
19:45
Search results for “Dog”
Sun 10th
11 SKY THREE
SKY THRE Premier R
Virgin Radi
Clyde 1
Thu 20th
-24 hours
Fri 21st
19:30 20:00
22:00 22:30
19:30 20:00
3
3, 4 to select “TV Guide
Explorer”, then OK
4
3, 4 to select “Series
Timer Rec” or “Find
Titles”, then OK
5
After searching > right, Tips in “Searching using
programme information of titles recorded to the HDD”
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
It may return to the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Searching using programme information of titles
recorded to the HDD
[HDD]
You can search for programmes using programme
information of titles recorded to the HDD. Also, if you
select “Series Timer Rec”, you can easily search for the
programme series and set series timer recordings.
VQT2J34
Find Titles
STOP
6
3, 4 to select “Simplified Search”
or “Detailed Search”, then OK
– Refer to step 5 (> left) for more information about
“Simplified Search” and “Detailed Search”.
7
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the
programme.
After searching > below, Tips
Notes
≥Searching by “Series Timer Rec” only works with titles recorded via
GUIDE Plus+.
≥If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
Tips
After searching
1 Press [OK].
2 If “Timer Recording” screen appears
Go to step 3 of “Timer Recording” (> 22)
If “Selection Screen” appears
Press [3, 4] to select the item.
≥“View” > 19, Watching Television
≥“Single Timer Rec.” > 22, Timer Recording, step 3
≥“Series Timer Rec.” > 33, Series recording, step 4
≥“Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
– The timer icon disappears.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
34
Series Timer Rec
– When searching using a word other than the title
name, enter a different word. (> 45, Entering Text)
The Dog Whispe...
The Dog Whispe...
Prog. Type
The Dog Whispe...
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the
programme.
OPTION
– When “Series Timer Rec” is selected
Go to step 4 of “Series recording” (> 33)
– When “Find Titles” is selected
Go to step 5 (> below)
Search results appear.
6
Next
3, 4, 2, 1 to select a title, then
3, 4 to select “Simplified Search”
or “Detailed Search”, then OK
Simplified Search:
Free Word Search
It searches the
Simplified Search
programme names
Detailed Search
only.
Detailed Search may result in
many
hits, but
Detailed Search:
search time will be longer.
It searches all the
information on the
programmes. It might take more time to search the
desired programme.
Info
2
3, 4 to select “Free Word
Search”, then OK
Enter the word you would like to
search for, then STOP
Next
Page 02/02
Select Previous
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button
to select “VIDEO”.
Select Advert
Free Word Search
OPTION
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 35 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Advanced Playback
Selecting Titles to Play
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can easily select and play recorded programmes by
using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the
Daily/weekly or series timer
recording mode are bundled and
displayed as one item.
(in Thumbnail Display)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
1
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles
HDD
007
VIDEO
PICTURE
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
---
---
10/10
Chantal Show
11/10
Dolphins
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Page 02/02
Select
RETURN
Next
Previous
Info
Next
[HDD] [RAM]
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title you
want to watch, then OK
2
Tips
To select the title with the numbered buttons
e.g.,
[HDD]
5: [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
e.g.,
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5: [0] > [5]
15: [1] > [5]
[HDD] To display the “Properties” screen
Press [STATUS ] when a title with “ Info” on the bottom of the All
Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected. (> 46)
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Protected.
t
μ
Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital
broadcasts, etc.)
It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.
Currently recording.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (> 31, Relief
Recording)
“One time only recording” restriction (> 92, CPRM)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
PICTURE
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
MUSIC
All Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
007
008
009
BBC 10/10 FRI
Chantal Show
---
BBC 11/10 SAT
Dolphins
---
BBC 18/10 SAT
Dolphins
---
MUSIC
2
---
OK
Previous
VIDEO
MUSIC
---
008
Grouped Titles
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
(in Thumbnail Display)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
([HDD] only)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV System currently selected on the unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit (> 74).
OPTION
Previous
Next
Page 02/02
Select Previous
OK
Next
Info
RETURN
Next
Page 02/02
OPTION
Select
Info
Previous
Next
Select the item marked with
and press [OK] to display the
bundled titles.
To sort the titles for easy searching
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback
of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles
continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to
another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be
cancelled.
To play grouped titles [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group, then press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title, then press
[OK].
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group, then
press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press [;] to cancel.
2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press [OK].
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create”, then press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping
Press [2, 1] to select “Release”, then press [OK].
≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group
are released.
≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from
the group.
Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press [OK].
e.g.,
Table Display
All Titles
PICTURE / MUSIC
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
10/10
Chantal Show
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
11/10
Dolphins
2
Next
Page 02/02
Select Previous
Info
BBC 11/10 SAT
Dolphins
Previous
Next
OK
RETURN
OPTION
BBC 18/10 SAT
Dolphins 2
Page 01/01
Select
Info
Next
To change the group name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].
4 Enter the name. (> 45, Entering Text)
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
Notes
This function is only available for Videos and not available for
music or still pictures.
35
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 36 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Advanced Playback
Search
Frame-by-Frame Viewing
During playback
or
– There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases
the search speed. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 speeds)
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Tips
Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
Skip
You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/
Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.
During playback or while paused
or
– Each press increases the number of skips.
Quick View (Play k 1.3)
[HDD] [RAM]
Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without
distorting the audio.
During playback PLAY x1.3
(Press and hold.)
– Press again to return to normal speed.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
– Each press shows the next or previous frame.
– Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-byframe in succession.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Notes
≥[VCD] allow Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.
Time Slip
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Use to skip in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.
1
During playback
2
3, 4 to select the time, then
ュユロユヵユ
リワヱヶヵ
ヴユロユヤヵ
≥[HDD]
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [1] > [5]
≥MP3
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [5]
15:
[1] > [5]
Slow-motion Play
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
While paused
or
– There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press
increases the speed.
– Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.
Notes
≥If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses
automatically (except [DVD-V] [VCD]).
≥[VCD] allow slow-motion in the forward direction only.
36
VQT2J34
TIME SLIP
OK
– Each time you press [3, 4], the time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1-minute
intervals.
– Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.
Direct Play
During playback, you can access specific titles or
scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.
1-
Manual Skip
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
1-minute skip function:
Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.
During playback
+60s
10-second skip back function:
Each time you press, play skips backward approximately
10 seconds.
During playback
-10s
Create Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
After creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can
easily reach the head of scene using [:, 9] (SKIP)
or play on Chapter View. (> 48)
During playback
CHAPTER
Tips
≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby (> 28).
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 37 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Showing the menu screen
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Insert the disc.
2 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the
item and press [OK].
e.g., [CD]
Disc
View Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3)
Copy Music ( MP3 )
Playing music files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
(> 17)
≥ You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while
recording or copying.
Show MP3 Menu screen.
1
(> left Showing the menu screen)
Selected group
[USB]
1 Insert the USB memory.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a file type and press [OK].
e.g.
MP3 Menu
CD
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/111
Number
0 – 9
USB device
Video ( MPEG2 )
Picture ( JPEG )
Music (MP3)
2
USB device
Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU Display
e.g. selecting a file to play
1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
CD
Playback
Recording
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
3 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the file type, then press [OK].
[USB]
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the file type, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “View Pictures ( JPEG )” or “Play
Music ( MP3)” then press [OK].
OK
Tips
≥“
” indicates the track currently playing.
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [:, 9].
To select the track with the numbered buttons
Picture
Music
Copy
Tree
A: Group No.
B: Track No. in the
group
C: Track No./Total
tracks in all groups
to play.
e.g.,
FUNCTION MENU
Group
My favorite
Track
001 Both Ends Freezing
002 Lady Starfish
003 Life on Jupiter
004 Metal Glue
005 Paint It Yellow
006 Pyjamamama
3, 4 to select a track, then
3 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the
item and press [OK].
View Pictures ( JPEG )
Start Slideshow
Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Selected Pictures ( JPEG )
No.
1 :
Total
1
2
3
4
5
6
5:
15:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
Notes
≥If the Power off link function (> 42) is activated, this unit will
automatically be set to standby mode and the music will stop as you
set the TV to set to standby mode.
Using the Tree Screen to Find a Group
1
From the track list
1 while a track is highlighted to
display the tree screen.
MP3 Menu
CD
G
8
T
14
TOTAL
40/111
Number
0 – 9
Tree
MP3 music
G 7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
A: Selected Group No./Total Group No.
If the group has no compatible track, “--” is
displayed as the group number.
B: You cannot select a group that contains no
compatible track.
2
3, 4 to select a group, then
OK
– The track list for the selected group appears.
Tips
To return to the track list
Press [RETURN ].
37
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 38 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Playing Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the shooting
date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 51).
Playing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
[HDD] [RAM]
≥ For more information about still picture files that can be
played on this unit (> 17)
1
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
(> 37, Showing the menu screen)
[HDD] [RAM]
While stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
001
VIDEO
Total 20
PICTURE
MUSIC
---
002
--.--.-Sample
Album View screen
Regarding Album View
screen > right
Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006
---
---
---
Sample pictures > right
Page 01/01
Previous
OK
Next
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the album,
then OK
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
Album Name
PICTURE
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Previous
OK
RETURN
e.g., HDD
103__DVD
0001
Page 001/001
OPTION
Total 68
Date: 10/10/2010
Number of pictures/Shooting date
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Album
002
10/10/10
Total 24
Zoological park
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC etc.,
the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this
case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].
Notes
Select All
Playlist View
Slideshow
OPTION
RETURN
3
002
Show Album View screen.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
2
Grouped by date
≥Still pictures cannot be played during recording or copying.
Sample Pictures
≥Sample JPEG pictures are pre-installed on HDD of this unit. You can
play them back or start slideshow (> below) with them.
If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection” and
then delete them. (> 47)
Start Slideshow
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant
interval with favourite music.
Next
Slideshow
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the still
picture, then OK
1
While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen
is displayed
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the album.
2
PLAY x1.3
Tips
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])
To stop viewing a picture
Press [∫].
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
To select the still picture or album with the numbered buttons
Album
e.g.,
5:
15:
115:
[0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [1] > [5]
[1] > [1] > [5]
Still picture
e.g.,
38
VQT2J34
5:
15:
115:
1115:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
[0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
[1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
Tips
You can also start Slideshow by pressing [OPTION] and press [3, 4]
to select “Start Slideshow” and then press [OK].
To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [;].
A check mark appears.
≥Press [;] again to cancel the selection.
3 Repeat steps 1-2 until you select all necessary albums.
4 Perform step 2.
To select all albums for starting Slideshow:
1 Press [∫] in step 1.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
3 Perform step 2.
[USB]
To start Slideshow on the menu screen:
1 Insert the USB memory.
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 37)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, then press [OK].
Notes
Sample Music is selected for default Background Music, which is
played with Slideshow. Refer to “Slideshow Settings” to turn off or
change the Background Music. (> 37)
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 39 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Rotate Pictures
Slideshow Settings
While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen
is displayed (> 38)
1
1
While playing a picture
2
3, 4 to select “Rotate
RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT”, then
OPTION
OPTION
3, 4 to select “Slideshow
Settings”, then OK
2
OK
RETURN
OK
4
3, 4 to select the item, then 2, 1 to
select the setting (> below).
5
After finishing settings
3, 4, 2, 1 to select “Set”, then
Rotate LEFT
OK
3, 4 to select “Picture Settings” or
“Background Music Settings”, then
3
Rotate RIGHT
Tips
To return to the picture to its original position
Press [3, 4] to select the opposite rotation in step 2, then press [OK].
Notes
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date
≥“Rotate RIGHT” and “Rotate LEFT” do not work during Slideshow.
Zoom
OK
1
While playing a picture
2
To zoom in:
OPTION
Picture Settings
Picture Settings
Please set the following functions.
Display Interval
Normal
Repeat Play
On
Random
Off
Cancel
Set
Set
SELECT
RETURN
Display Interval:
Select the desired interval. (“Normal”, “Long” or
“Short”)
≥The display interval may vary depending on the
picture data size.
Repeat Play:
Select “On” to play pictures in the selected album
repeatedly.
Random:
Select “On” to play pictures in the selected album at
random.
Background Music Settings
Background Music Settings
Please set the following functions.
Background Music
On
Random
Off
Music Selection
3, 4 to select “Zoom in”, then
OK
Tips
To return to the picture to its original size
Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step2, then press [OK].
Notes
≥When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
≥“Zoom in” information is not stored.
≥“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work with images that have a
resolution larger than 640k480 pixels.
≥“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work during Slideshow.
Picture Properties
Picture information is shown (e.g., shooting date).
While playing a picture
ヴヵモヵヶヴ
twice to display picture properties.
Sample Music
Cancel
Set
Set
SELECT
18:53:50 11/10
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1/ 1/ 2010
No.
RETURN
Background Music: Select “On” to play Slideshow with Background
Music.
Select “Off” to play Slideshow without Background
Music.
Random:
Select “On” to play Background Music at random.
Music Selection:
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Music Selection” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background Music
and press [OK].
≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on HDD.
3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music and press
[OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”.
Shooting Date
≥Depending on the camera or
editing software; shooting dates
may not be displayed correctly.
Or
1
Notes
≥Music albums on HDD, a disc and a USB memory can be used as the
Slideshow Background Music. However, when selecting still images
on a disc or a USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the
same media cannot be used as the Background Music. (Even if a
music album on the same media is selected, the music is not played.)
≥“Sample Music” cannot be deleted or changed to other files.
≥“Music Selection” setting turns back to “Sample Music” when
removing media on which specified Background Music is recorded or
deleting specified Background Music files.
≥DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music.
3/9
From the Picture (JPEG) View screen
3, 4, 2, 1 to select the
picture, then
2
OPTION
3, 4 to select “Properties”, then
OK
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
– To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
39
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 40 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Playing music
Tips
To play music CD
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1
Notes
Insert a music CD.
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the
screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed if “Screen
Saver” is set to “On” in the Setup menu (> 74). To return to the
previous screen, press [OK].
The menu is automatically displayed.
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
Useful functions during music play
SELECT
OK
2
Operations during play
RETURN
3, 4 to select “Play Music”, then
Stop
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
≥ If [∫] is pressed several times, the position
is cleared.
Pause
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
Press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Skip
During play or while paused, press [:]
or [9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
Each press increases the number of skips.
Repeat Play
[HDD]
You can select the item which you want to
repeat.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play
Setting”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press
[OK].
≥ Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
Sort
[HDD]
You can change the order of the Album View
alphabetically.
While Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort”, then press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name”,
then press [OK].
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [3, 4] to select “No.”, then press [OK].
Properties
[HDD]
While Track View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then
press [OK].
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
OK
– The music CD starts playing back.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] > [5], 15: [1] > [5]
To play music recorded on HDD
Copying music to HDD > 64
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow”
button to select “MUSIC”.
2
3, 4 to select the album, then
OK
≥You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [1] > [5]
115:
[1] > [1] > [5]
3
3, 4 to select the track, then
OK
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
115:
[0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
40
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 41 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Convenient Functions
FUNCTION MENU Display
By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the
main functions quickly and easily.
≥ If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the
Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears
when you turn the power on. (> 41)
1
2
With the unit stopped
3, 4 to select a function, then
3, 4 to select an item, then
Remain
Playback
Delete
30:00 SP
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
DELETE Navigator
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Previous
OK
RETURN
OK
OPTION
You can access
selected function
easily.
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
11/10
Dolphins
MUSIC
2
Page 02/02
Select
Info
PICTURE
Next
Previous
Next
≥ Picture (> 38)
≥ Top Menu (> 20)
Recording
Select when you wish to perform manual timer
recording, or check the timer recording. The timer
recording list will be displayed. (> 29, 30)
Delete
Select the title or file type you wish to delete. The
DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.
≥ Video (> 23)
To exit the FUNCTION MENU
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
You can pause the TV programme you are watching
using this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily
saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to
briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop Pause Live TV function, then the TV
programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be
deleted.
1 Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV
input to suit the connections to this unit.
2 Turn on this unit and press [W X CH] to select the
channel.
3 When you want to pause the TV programme
Press [PAUSE LIVE TV].
HDD

BBC
Playback
Select when you wish to playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will
be displayed.
≥ Video (> 20, 35)
≥ Music (> 37, 40)
≥ Menu (> 20)
≥ USB
Tips
Video
Picture
Music
Recording
≥ DVD
Select
a function
and an item.
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
≥ HDD
To pause the TV programme you are
watching —Pause Live TV
OK
3
Drive Select
Change which drive is used.
≥ Picture (> 53) ≥ Music (> 53)
Copy
Select the copy method.
≥ Video (HDD to DVD) (> 58)
≥ Advanced Copy (> 59)
≥ Copy Music (> 64)
TV Guide
Select when you wish to watch or record a programme.
The TV Guide will be displayed. (> 19, 22)
Others
Select and execute a function other than those above,
such as recording or setting.
This icon indicates that the
Pause Live TV is working.
Pause Live TV
4 When you want to resume playback
Press [1] (PLAY).
– The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording
mode (> 25) regardless of the recording mode and the
drive selected before starting saving.
– At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary
depending on the HDD free space.)
Operations during Pause Live TV
Search
Press [6, 5].
Pause
Press [;].
≥ Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
Quick View
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
≥ Press again to return to the normal speed.
Slow-motion
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥ Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Stop Pause
Live TV
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press
[OK].
Notes
≥The pause live TV function does not work for Digital Teletext. (> 44)
≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
– when the clock is not set
– while recording
– while timer recording
– while EXT LINK recording, etc.
≥You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play.
≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is full
or the saving lasts 8 hours.
≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after started.
≥“DVB Multi Audio” of on-screen menu cannot be switched during
Pause Live TV.
≥ Playlists (> 49, 54)
≥ Flexible Rec (> 27)
≥ HDD Management (> 68)≥ DVD Management (> 68)
≥ Setup (> 70)
41
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 42 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver
by using “VIERA Link” or Q Link.
(When the TV is on) Easy playback
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”? [VIERA]Link]
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers
linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by
connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the
operating instructions for connected equipment for operational
details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we
have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
≥“HDAVI Control 5” is the newest standard (current as of December,
2009) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment.
≥This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI
equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation:
1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully wired
21-pin Scart cable (> 12), or to your receiver using an HDMI cable
(> 79).
2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 75). (The default setting is “On”.)
3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
What is Q Link? [Q]Link]
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this
unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the
equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
When the TV is on and the following operations are
performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode
([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few
seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK]
etc.
(When the TV is off) Power on link
[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When the TV is off and the following operations are
performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few
seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2,
[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK]]
etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also
automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the
FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed, during playback or
when the unit is set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not be turned
off at the same time when recording, copying, finalising
etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn
off.
Direct TV Recording [VIERA]Link]
Preparation:
≥ Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(> 10, 11).
§3
[Q]Link]
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV.
Notes
≥Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function
may not work.
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function
to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
Recording starts
To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥The titles are recorded to the HDD.
≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the
Direct TV Recording may stops.
≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 28), Direct TV
Recording is unavailable.
Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.
§1
§2
Notes
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment
condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected
equipment (e.g., TV) too.
42
VQT2J34
§3
This button is available only when this unit is on.
When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately
displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the
contents from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback
started.
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control
3” or later.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 43 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Easy control only with VIERA remote
control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control
2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more
convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote
control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the
TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot
operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
≥ The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press
incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
≥ The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked
operation is finished.
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit
[VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the
“Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVDVideo.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV
remote control. (> left)
2 Press [OPTION].
Control Panel
≥You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed or while DVDVideo is being copied.
3 Select an item, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Menu
Drive Select
OK
Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this unit [VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 2” or later.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV
remote control.
≥If this unit is turned off, this unit will turn on automatically.
≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 41, 74)
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote
control, then press [OK].
Pause Live TV programme [VIERA]Link]
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI
Control 3” or later.
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and
resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful
when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV
remote control.
≥This unit turns on automatically.
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (> right), then press [OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
Refer to “Notes” on page 41, “To pause the TV programme you
are watching —Pause Live TV”.
Tips
To stop Pause Live TV
1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
RETURN
Switch to TV
Displayed when watching with the
tuner of this unit. It will return to the
TV picture.
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed.
(> below)
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Top Menu is displayed. (> 20)
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed. (> 20)
Standby Settings
“Standby Settings” screen is
displayed (> 76).
Drive Select
Select the HDD, DVD drive.
Slideshow
“Album View” screen is displayed
(> 38).
Rotate RIGHT/Rotate
LEFT (JPEG)
Rotate the still pictures. (> 39)
Zoom in/Zoom out
(JPEG)
Enlarge or shrink the still picture.
(> 39)
Audio Description
Audio Description screen is
displayed. (> 44)
Using the Control Panel
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward,
search forward, stop, etc. with the TV remote control.
Select “Control Panel”, then press [OK] in step3 (> above).
The Control Panel is displayed (> right)
Control Panel
≥ While playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
Pause
– [3]: Pause, [4]:Stop,
Exit
[2]: Search backward,
Search
Search
[1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play,
Play
[EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel
Stop
≥ While playing still pictures
– [4]: Stop, [2]:View previous picture,
[1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit
to standby mode
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control, then set to standby
mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 75).
43
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 44 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Information Messages
Listening to the Audio Description
Digital Channel Information
You can display the information about programmes
(programme name, broadcast time, etc.).
With the unit stopped
This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an
audio track to describe events on-screen.
1
When “AD” appears in digital channel information
2
3, 4 to select “Audio Description”,
then OK
ヴヵモヵヶヴ
to show the screen information.
When the digital channel information is being displayed
– Press [STATUS ] again and detailed information
will be displayed (only when “info ” is displayed).

1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 – 17:15
“info
3
4
”
Exit info
Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
Detailed
information
Signal Quality (> 45)
1 BBC ONE Wales No Signal 19:03 All Channels
Change Category
BBC News
info
TXT
Subtitle
Programme name 19:00 - 19:30
NOW
and Broadcast time Encrypted AD Multi Audio
≥To turn off the Audio Description
In the step 4 (> above), press [2, 1] to select “Off”, then press
[RETURN ].
≥To change the volume
In the step 3 (> above), press [3, 4] to select “Volume” and press [2, 1]
to set the volume, then press [RETURN ].
≥You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during
recording and timer recording.
Showing the Digital Teletext
When “TXT” appears in digital channel information
ヵユヹヵ
During scrambled broadcasting (You cannot watch
the broadcast).
Audio Description service may be available.
Programme is broadcast in multi-channel sound
(> 67, DVB Multi Audio).
To select audio language
(> 71, DVB Preferred Multi Audio)
Digital Teletext may be available.
Subtitle may be available.
Even with programmes with “AD”, “Multi e.g.,
Audio”, “TXT” and “Subtitle” indications, 1 BBC ONE Wales
17:11 All Channels
Wales today
you may not be able to use these
17:00 - 17:15
Exit info
NOW
services. To confirm the availability of
[AD,S]
these services, refer to the indications in
Subtitle
AD
the detailed information too.§
§
These indications are not displayed properly unless the
information sent from broadcast stations is correct.
Tips
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
≥NOW: current programme
≥NEXT: next programme
To select the information of another channel
Press [3, 4].
≥Press [OK] to watch the selected channel.
To change the length of time digital channel information is
displayed for
(> 74, On-Screen Messages)
Notes
≥Every time you change the channel, digital channel information
appears automatically. They disappear again after a short time.
≥If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that is not
being received correctly, digital channel information is also recorded
and will remain visible during playback.
VQT2J34
RETURN
Tips
17:11 All Channels
NOW
In the 1970’s, John Belshi, working with National Lampoon, mol with Dan
Aykuoyd, then a host of a children’s tv program, and owner of a
speakeasy called the “505 Club”. Dan from Toronto, put on a record
called Straight Up. by the Downchild Blues Band.
Category(Favourite> 70)
44
2, 1 to select “Auto”, then
≥Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record
them with “Audio Description” set to “Auto”.
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 - 17:15
Channel and Station Name
3, 4 to select “Audio Description”.
Notes
17:11 All Channels
Change Category
info
NOW
Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
Digital channel
information
to show the OPTION menu.
– Audio Description screen appears.
Status message (> 45)
HDD
1: 07 SP
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
OPTION
to show the Digital Teletext.
– Press again to hide.
Notes
≥During recording the Digital Teletext function is not possible.
≥When subtitle is on or the digital channel information is displayed, the
Digital Teletext function does not work.
Tips
To view another page of Digital Teletext
Press [3, 4] to select another page, then press [OK].
≥You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.
Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation
Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
Showing Subtitles
When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information
ヴヵヵロ
to show subtitles.
– Press again to hide.
Notes
≥Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with
the subtitles setting set to “Subtitles On”.
≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
Tips
To select subtitle language (> 71, DVB Preferred Subtitles)
Changing the Category
You can select one of your favourite channels by changing the
category [such as Free Channels, Radio and Registered
Favourites (> 70)].
When digital channel information is displayed
(Blue)
to change the category.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 45 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Entering Text
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
Signal Quality
No Signal:
No Service:
The digital broadcast signal is not
being received.
No broadcasts are currently available.
Notes
Also, you can search for desired programmes on
GUIDE Plus+ list by entering key words or the
programme name. (Free Word Search, Find Titles)
(> 34)
When viewing the “Enter Title Name” screen
etc.
1
Enter Title Name
_
≥If “No Signal” is displayed, check that the current digital broadcast
channel is correctly broadcasting.
Top Menu Preview
Status Messages
The following messages and displays appear to let you
know what operations are being performed and the
status of the unit.
DVD REC
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
Remain
Elapsed play time
and recording mode
 T2
13:50 XP
0:00.10 XP
HDD
REC
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
15:05:13
Live
15:10:46
Current time
F
d
e
f
I
g
h
i
K
L
j
l

Add to List
6 M N
O
k
m n

Name List
7 P
8 T
Q
R
U
V
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
?
!
New Channel Message
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be
informed automatically. Then the confirmation
message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display,
Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings and Favourites
are deleted and the timer recording programmes are
also cancelled.). However recordings on the HDD will
not be deleted.
New Channel
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
No
OK
S
/
0
e.g., “Enter Title
Name” screen
%
$
&
@
o
[
]
_
p
q
r
s
(
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
w
x
"
'
y
:
z
;
\
`
|
^
Space
RETURN
2
STOP
when you’ve finished
entering text.
Tips
∫ To add a name to the list
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 44
After entering the name (step 1)
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List”, then press
[OK].
≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
2. Press [2, 1] to select “Add”, then press [OK].
≥Press [RETURN
No Display
Yes
E
H
9
DVD REC
Elapsed recording
time and recording mode
When using Pause Live TV
The time when the picture currently displayed was
broadcasted
Play
3 D
8
To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢], then press [OK].
To delete a character
Press [;] on a character in the name field.
To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN ].
≥Characters will not be saved.
The current date and time
0:05.14 XP
c
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g.: entering the letter “R”
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3 Press [OK].
Channel information
18:53:50 11/10
7
b
– Repeat this step to enter other characters.
Remaining recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “13:50 XP” indicates 13 hour and 50 minutes
in XP mode)
• Disc remaining time may slightly differ between
different models.
 T1
6
a
4
3, 4, 2, 1 to select a
character, then OK
Several times to cycle through
available displays.
Current media
Shows current recording or play status.
5
C
5 J
OK
HDD
REC
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
3
B
4 G
SELECT
ヴヵモヵヶヴ
2
2 A
 Delete
 Set
During playback and/or recording
1 1
RETURN
Tips
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 45).
] to cancel.
∫ To recall an added name
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List”, then press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled,
then press [OK].
∫ To delete an added name
1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List”, then press
[OK].
2.
3.
4.
5.
≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name”, then press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Press [RETURN ].
Notes
≥The number of characters that can be entered depends on what
kind of things you name.
≥If you enter a long name, only part of it
Enter Title Name
is shown in the Top Menu after
_
Chapter
1_
finalisation (> 69). When entering a
1 1
Top Menu Preview
title name, the name that will appear in
2 A
Chapter 1
the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top
3 D
Menu Preview” window.
4 G
 Delete
5 J
45
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 46 ページ
Advanc
ed
Editing
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Titles—Editing
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You can not edit finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen:
deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials, changing
Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.
Tips
≥ Maximum numbers of titles on a disc
[HDD]
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
499
99
49
Accessing the Title View
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title.
– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)
4 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
≥ Items that cannot be selected are grey.
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Title
Operations”
(> right)
Delete
Partial Delete
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Edit
Divide Title
TV Guide Explorer
Searching using programme
information of titles recorded to the
HDD (> 34)
Release Grouping
Delete
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Use to delete unneeded titles.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Notes
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> 68, Setting Protection).
Create Group
Title Operations
≥ [HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item increases the available disc
space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space does not
increase after deletion.
≥ [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space increases when you
delete the last title (the recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted).
≥ Available disc space may not increase after deleting a short
title.
≥ [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total disc space, the
disc needs to be formatted. (> 68)
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
To view title information (e.g., date, time)
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥ [+R] [+R]DL] Management information is recorded in unused
sections when you edit discs. The available space on these
discs decreases each time you edit their contents.We
recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to
discs.
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Set up Protection, Cancel Protection)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
46
VQT2J34
Football
Edit
TV Guide Explorer
Create Group
Chapter View
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
Table Display
(> 35)
All Titles
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
PICTURE/MUSIC
appearance (> 35)
If you select “Chapter View” (> 48)
Properties
Delete
Properties
Release Grouping
No.
Date
Channel
001
Time18:07
12/11/2006 SUN Rec time2:15(SP)
Genre
Sport
T5
Chapter View
Table Display
OK
RETURN
Tips
≥ [HDD] You can also press [STATUS ] to display the
“Properties” screen when a title with “ Info” on the bottom
of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected.
Enter Title Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give a name for the title.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name”, then press
[OK].
Entering Text (> 45)
– [HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title
names in the group will not be changed.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 47 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Changes the thumbnail picture shown in the Title View screen.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 46).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel
Protection”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 46).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then
press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
The lock symbol appears
when the title is protected.
All Titles
Enter Title Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
007
008
Cancel Protection
BBC 0 27/10 MON
BBC 0 27/10
Change Thumbnail
--
--
Divide Title
VIDEO

008
Set up Protection
Change
Finish
Partial Delete
0:00.01
Change
- -:- -.- -
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
OK
Partial Delete
RETURN
[HDD] [RAM]
Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials.
Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 46).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Partial Delete”, then press
[OK].
Enter Title Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
008
Set up Protection
PLAY
VIDEO
Start
End
Cancel Protection
Next
Partial Delete
Finish
0:43.21
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
7 Press [OK] to set the “Start” point and then press
[OK] again to set the “End” point of the section you
want to erase.
– For quicker editing (> below, Tips)
– To delete multiple sections:
Press [3, 4] to select “Next”, and repeat this step.
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Notes
≥ You may not be able to specify start and end points within 3
seconds of each other.
≥ Available disc space may not increase after erasing short
parts of titles.
7 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
8 Press [OK] at the point you want to use as the
thumbnail.
– For quicker editing (> below, Tips)
– To change the thumbnail:
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then
press [OK] at the point you want to use as the
thumbnail.
9 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM]
You can divide a title into two.
Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.
Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 46).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Divide Title”, then press [OK].
Enter Title Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
HDD
Set up Protection
VIDEO
PLAY
008
Preview
Divide
Cancel Protection
Finish
Partial Delete
0:00.00
Change Thumbnail
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Divide Title
OK
RETURN
7 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing (> below, Tips)
– Selecting “Preview”, then pressing [OK] plays the title
from 10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the division
point.
– To change the point to divide at:
Press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [1] (PLAY)
to bring to the point where you want to divide, then
press [OK].
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Divide”, then press [OK].
– The title is divided at that point.
Notes
≥ Divided titles retain the name of the original.
≥ A short amount of video and audio just before and after the
division point get cut out.
≥ You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too
short or total number of titles exceeds 99.
≥ [HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
Tips
For quicker editing
≥ Use Search (> 36) or Time Slip (> 36) to find the desired point.
≥ To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
≥ For better precision, use Slow-motion (> 36) and Frame-by-Frame (> 36).
47
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 48 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Chapters—Creating and Editing
[HDD] [RAM]
When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can easily
reach the head of scene using [:, 9] (SKIP) or play on
Chapter View.
Tips
≥ Chapter
Each section between the division points becomes a
chapter.
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
≥ [HDD] [RAM]: You can change the order of chapters and
create a Playlist (Video) (> 49).
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 72)
“Automatic”:
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the
end of the programme) in the scene during recording and sets
chapter start points on them automatically.
≥ Depending on the programme to be recorded or the
Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be
created correctly.
“5 minutes”:
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5-minute interval.
≥ Maximum numbers of chapters on a disc
[HDD]: Approx. 1000 per title
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: Approx. 1000
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Approx. 254
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Chapter Operations
Delete Chapter
You can delete the chapters for each title.
Important: Once deleted, recorded contents cannot be
recovered.
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Chapter”, then press
[OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Create Chapter
You can divide a title into multiple chapters.
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Chapter”, then press
[OK].
Accessing the Chapter View
Allows viewing and editing chapters individually.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the
“Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title.
4 Press [OPTION] to display the OPTION
Delete
menu.
Properties
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”
Edit
then press [OK].
TV Guide Explorer
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
Create Group
chapter.
Release Grouping
– Multiple editing (> right, Tips)
Chapter View
To play
Table Display
Press [OK].
To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter
Operations” (> right).
Title View
You can go back to the Title View.
48
VQT2J34
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
HDD
Delete Chapter
008
VIDEO
PLAY
Create
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Finish
0:43.21
Title View
OK
RETURN
9 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing (> 47, Tips)
– Repeat this step to create additional chapters.
: Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ A short portion of the title just after the creation point may be
lost.
Combine Chapters
You can combine the divided chapters.
Perform steps 1 –
of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).
8 Press [3, 4] to select “Combine Chapters”, then
press [OK].
9 Press [2] to select “Combine”, then press [OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined with the next
chapter.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 49 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video)
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (play only)
You can create Playlists (Video) by grouping your favourite
scenes (chapters) from the recorded titles and edit the created
Playlists (Video).
Tips
[HDD] [RAM]
A Playlist (Video) is a compilation of your favourite chapters
as shown in the chart below.
Title
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Playlist (Video)
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Copying (> 56) a Playlist (Video) will create a title.
≥Editing Playlists (Video) doesn’t modify titles.
≥Playlists (Video) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use
much capacity.
Creating Playlists (Video)
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform steps 1 – 4b of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”.
(> left)
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title, then press [4].
– Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step 7.
6 Press [2, 1] to select the source chapter you want to
add to a Playlist (Video), then press [OK].
– Press [3] to cancel.
– Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter”, then press
[OK] if you want to create a new chapter in the source
title (> 48).
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to insert the
chapter, then press [OK].
– Press [3] repeatedly to return to step 5, if you want to
add additional source titles.
Chapters are registered to the Playlist (Video). Repeat steps 6
and 7 to add other chapters.
8 Press [RETURN ] to finish and exit the screen.
Notes
≥ Playlists (Video) cannot be created while recording or
copying.
≥ You are allowed a maximum of 99 Playlists (Video), with
approximately 1000 chapters per Playlist (Video).
Accessing the Playlist (Video) View
Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters
Preparation:
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the
recorded title to be edited.
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> 68, Setting Protection).
With the unit stopped
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
Playback
HDD Management
Setup
Delete
Recording
Copy
TV Guide
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Others
4c
[HDD] [RAM]
Use to delete unneeded Playlists (Video).
Important: Once deleted, Playlists (Video) contents cannot be
recovered (titles are not affected).
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”.
(> left)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
4b
Playlists
Flexible Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Copy
OK
4a
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Delete
RETURN
[HDD]
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to
select “VIDEO”.
To play
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlists (Video) to
play, then press [OK].
To create
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”, then press
[OK] (> right, Creating Playlists (Video)).
To edit
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlists (Video),
then press [OPTION].
– Multiple editing (> 50, Tips in “Edit”)
Tips
To delete during play
1. Press [DELETE ¢]. A confirmation message displays.
2. Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
Playlist (Video) information (e.g., length and date) is shown.
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”.
(> left)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
Tips
[HDD]
Create
Copy
Delete
Enter Name
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Refer to “Editing
Playlists (Video)/
Chapters” (> right).
To exit the screen
Press [OK].
Edit
Chapter View
PICTURE
If you select “Chapter View” (> 50)
49
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 50 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video)
Chapter Operations
Edit
[HDD] [RAM]
You can create and copy Playlists (Video), and change the
thumbnail.
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”
(> 49).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the
menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).
Create
Add Chapter
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Chapter”,
then press [OK]. (> 49, Creating
Playlists (Video))
Move Chapter
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Move Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
position to insert the chapter, then press
[OK].
Playlists
HDD
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create”, then
press [OK]. (> 49, Creating Playlists
(Video))
Copy
001
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name”,
then press [OK].
2 Enter a name for the Playlists (Video).
(> 45, Entering Text).
Change
Thumbnail
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Change
Thumbnail”, then press [OK].
2 Press [1] (PLAY). Use Time Slip
(> 36), Slow-motion (> 36), Frame-byFrame (> 36), or Search (> 36) to find
the desired point.
3 Press [OK] at the image you wish you
use for your thumbnail.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then
press [OK].
– The thumbnail picture is now
changed.
Tips
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Copy)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Chapter View
[HDD] [RAM]
You can add, move, divide, combine or delete chapters in the
Playlists (Video).
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”
(> 49).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a chapter.
– Multiple editing (> right, Tips)
To play
Press [OK].
To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter Operations”
(> right)
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
50
VQT2J34
You can go back to the Playlist View.
VIDEO
---
---
0:19.36
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
OK
RETURN
Create
Chapter
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [1] (PLAY). Use Time Slip (> 36),
Slow-motion (> 36), Frame-by-Frame
(> 36), or Search (> 36) to find the
desired point.
3 Press [OK] at the point you want to
divide.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then
press [OK].
Combine
Chapters
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Combine
Chapters”, then press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Combine”, then
press [OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined
with the next chapter.
Delete
Chapter
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
002
0:10.24
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Copy”, then press
[OK].
Enter Name
Move Chapter
01 12/10 SUN 0:11
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 51 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Still Pictures and Music—Editing
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture
View
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG)
You can edit pictures and albums.
Preparation:
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD drive.
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> 68, Setting Protection)
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Editing an album:
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)
– When you want to create an album using “Create
Album”, press [OPTION] without selecting album.
Editing a still picture:
2 1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains the still picture to edit, then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture.
– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)
3 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
≥ Items that cannot be selected are grey.
e.g., [HDD] Editing an album
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Settings
Add Pictures
Create Album
Edit Album
Copy to DVD
Playlist View
VIDEO/MUSIC
Refer to “Start Slideshow”/
“Slideshow Settings”(> 38)
Refer to “Album
(still picture)/
Change Date
Picture
Set up Protection
Operations”
Cancel Protection
(> right)
Switch to Playlists (Picture)
(> 38)
Delete Album
e.g., [HDD] Editing a still picture
Delete Pictures
Properties
Change Date
Refer to “Album (still picture)/
Picture Operations” (> right).
Cancel Protection
You can go back to the Album View.
Notes
≥ You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/
CD-RW and USB memory.
≥ You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.
Tips
Notes
≥ Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change
Date”, “Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or
“Create Album”.
Add Pictures/Create Album
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> left).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Pictures” or “Create
Album”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Start” or “Yes”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album containing
picture to add, then press [OK].
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Select pictures to copy” or
“Copy all pictures”, then press [OK].
≥ If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the picture, then press
[OK].
≥ If “Copy all pictures” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
8 Press [1] to select “No” to finish copying, then press
[OK].
– If you want to continue copying, select “Yes”, then
repeat steps 6 – 7 .
Only when you select “Create Album”
9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”, then press [OK].
≥ If “Yes” is selected
You can give a name for the album (> 45, Entering
Text).
≥ If “No” is selected
The album name is automatically given.
Notes
≥ [RAM] “Add Pictures” is available only for the folders
conforming to DCF.
Delete Album/Delete Pictures
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] (JPEG)
Set up Protection
Album View
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
[Only Delete Album, Delete Pictures, Change Date (Only
when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed), Set up
Protection, Cancel Protection, Copy to DVD, Copy to HDD]
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
To select all albums
Press [∫]. After confirmation message appears, press [2] to
select “Yes”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
≥ When deleting an album, non-picture files in the album will
also be deleted. (This does not apply to subordinate folders in
the album.)
≥ [-R] Available space does not increase even after pictures are
deleted.
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> left).
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Album” or “Delete
Pictures”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel
Protection” and then delete them. (> 47)
51
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 52 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Still Pictures and Music—Editing
Enter Album Name
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> 51).
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Album Name”, then
press [OK].
– You can give a name for the album (> 45, Entering
Text).
Notes
≥ Album names entered using this unit may not be displayed
on other equipment.
Copy to DVD/Copy to HDD
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> 51).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to DVD” or “Copy to
HDD”, then press [OK].
5 For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ When copying to DVD-R, use blank discs or unfinalised
discs on which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.
Change Date
[HDD] [RAM]
You can change the date of this picture.
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> 51).
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Change Date”, then press
[OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select the item, then press [3, 4] to
change.
6 Press [OK].
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
[HDD] [RAM]
Set protection to prevent pictures from being accidentally
deleted.
≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,
then press [OK] after step 3.
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel
Protection”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
– The lock symbol “ ” appears when the still picture or
album is protected.
Notes
≥ Even if you set protection using this unit, album may be
deleted by other equipment.
52
VQT2J34
Properties
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.
Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (> 51).
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
≥ To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 53 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Accessing the Album and Track View
[HDD]
Preparation:
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow”
button to select “MUSIC”.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album, then press
[OPTION].
Editing a track
2 1. Press [3, 4] to select the album, then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4] to select the track, then press
[OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation, then press [OK].
To edit the album (Music)
Delete Album
Enter Album Name
Deleting still pictures and music using
DELETE Navigator
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> 68, Setting Protection)
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] (JPEG)
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
2 Press FUNCTION MENU.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or “Music”, then
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Album and Track Operation
(> below)
Playback
Video
Recording
Picture
Music
Delete
Copy
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Album View
10/ 10/ 10 Total 5
---
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
---
002
001
10/ 10/ 10 Total 3
---
---
TV Guide
Repeat Play Setting
Track View
Sort
Useful functions during music play
(> 40)
> below
To edit the track (Music)
Delete Track
Properties
Enter Track Name
Album and Track Operation
(> below)
Enter Artist Name
Repeat Play Setting
Album View
You can go back to Album View
Useful functions during music play (> 40)
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Album and Track Operation
After performing steps 1 – 3 (> above)
Delete Album
Delete Track
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then
press [OK].
≥ Once deleted, the recorded contents
are lost and cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
Enter Album Name
Enter Track Name
You can give names to albums and
tracks. (> 45, Entering Text)
Enter Artist Name
You can edit the artist name of the
track. (> 45, Entering Text)
Others
Drive Select
OK
Previous
Page 01/01
Next
RETURN
OK
OPTION
Select
RETURN
Press OK to show
pictures.
Deleting an album:
5a Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item, then press
[DELETE ¢].
Deleting a still picture or track:
5b 1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which
contains the still picture or track to delete, then
press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or
track, then press [OK].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Tips
To view other pages [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
– [HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item increases the available space
by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
≥ When the timer recording starts, “Delete Album” and “Delete
Track” stops on the way.
≥ “Sample Music” is not displayed on the MUSIC screen.
53
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 54 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Picture)
[HDD]
You can create Playlists (Picture) by grouping your favourite still
pictures in albums stored on HDD and edit the Playlists
(Picture).
Tips
A Playlist (Picture) is a compilation of your favourite still
pictures as shown in the chart below.
4d
To edit a still picture
1 Select the Playlist (Picture) which contains still
pictures to edit, then press [OK].
2 Select the still pictures to edit, then press
[OPTION].
– Multiple editing (> 55, Tips in “Editing still pictures”)
Properties
Album 1
Album 2
Still picture Still picture Still picture
Still picture Still picture
Move Pictures
Delete Pictures
Playlist View
Playlist (Picture) Still picture Still picture Still picture
Copying (> 56) a Playlist (Picture) will create an album.
(Background Music cannot be copied.)
≥Editing still pictures in a Playlist (Picture) doesn’t modify source
albums or source still pictures.
≥Playlists (Picture) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t
use much capacity.
Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View
Preparation:
≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
With the unit stopped
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playlists
Flexible Rec
Playback
HDD Management
Setup
Delete
Recording
Playlists
Flexible Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Copy
Copy
TV Guide
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Others
Drive Select
OK
OK
RETURN
RETURN
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to
select “PICTURE”.
4a
4b
4c
To play
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlist (Picture) to
play, then press [OK].
To create
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”, then press
[OK] (> right, Creating Playlists (Picture)).
To edit a Playlist (Picture)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlist (Picture),
then press [OPTION].
– Multiple editing (> 55, Tips in “Editing Playlists
(Picture)”)
Slideshow Settings
(> 55, Start Slideshow/Slideshow
Settings)
Delete
Create
Edit
Copy
Start Slideshow
Copy to DVD
Album View
VIDEO
(> 50, Edit)
Enter Playlist Name
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations
(> 51)
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video) (> 49)
54
VQT2J34
Editing still pictures (> 55)
Add Pictures
You can go back to
Playlist View ( Picture ).
Creating Playlists (Picture)
Perform steps 1 – 4b of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)
View”. (> left)
5 Press [2, 1] to select an album (a folder) in “Source
Albums”, then press [4].
– Press [OK] to select all still pictures in the album, then
skip to step 8.
– Press [3] to cancel.
6 Press [2, 1] to select the still picture you want to
add to a Playlist (Picture), then press [;].
– A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
– Press [;] again to cancel.
7 Press [OK].
8 Press [2, 1] to select the position to insert the still
picture, then press [OK].
– Press [3] to select other “Source Albums”, then repeat
steps 5–8 to add pictures in other albums.
9 Press [RETURN ].
: Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” if you want to name the
Playlist (Picture).
– Entering Text > 45
; Select the Background Music if you want to change
Background Music.
– If “No” is selected, Sample Music is set for Background Music.
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background
Musick, then press [OK].
≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on
HDD.
3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music, then
press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”.
≥Background Music on Playlists (Picture) can be specified
for each Playlist (Picture). (> 55)
All the selected pictures become a Playlist (Picture).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
≥ Playlists (Picture) cannot be created or edited while
recording or copying.
≥ You are allowed a maximum of 99 Playlists (Picture), with
approximately 3000 pictures per Playlist (Picture).
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 55 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Editing Playlists (Picture)
Start Slideshow
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)
View”. (> 54)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, then press
[OK].
(> 38, Start Slideshow, Steps 1-2)
Notes
≥You cannot select multiple Playlists (Picture) or all Playlists
(Picture).
Slideshow Settings
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)
View”. (> 54)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Settings”, then
press [OK].
Copy to DVD
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View”
(> 54).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to DVD”, then press
[OK].
6a For copy to DVD-RAM
Press [2, 1] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
6b For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ When copying to DVD-R, use blank discs or unfinalised
discs on which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.
Tips
≥Slideshow Settings are retained only for the specified Playlist
(Picture).
≥Music CD (CD-DA) is used for Background Music when inserting
Music CD.
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Copy to DVD, Copy)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Delete
Editing still pictures
(> 39, Slideshow Settings)
Notes
Use to delete unneeded Playlists (Picture).
Important: Once deleted, Playlist (Picture) contents cannot be
recovered (still pictures are not affected).
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)
View”. (> 54)
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
You can add, move or delete still pictures in the Playlist (Picture).
Perform steps 1 – 4d of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View”
(> 54).
5 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the
menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).
Properties
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then
press [OK]. (> 51, Album (still picture)/
Picture Operations)
Add Pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Pictures”,
then press [OK]. (> 54, Creating
Playlists (Picture))
Move Pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Move Pictures”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
position to insert the still picture, then
press [OK].
Tips
To delete during play
1. Press [DELETE ¢]. A confirmation message displays.
2. Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.
Edit
You can create and copy Playlists (Picture).
Playlists
HDD
Perform steps 1 – 4c of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View”
(> 54).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the
menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).
Move Pictures
Playlist Name
PICTURE
Playlist 01
0002
----
----
----
---
----
----
----
---
----
----
0001
0:10.24
Previous
Page 001/001
Next
OK
RETURN
Create
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create”, then
press [OK]. (> 54, Creating Playlists
(Picture))
Delete
Pictures
Copy
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Copy”, then press
[OK].
Tips
Enter Playlist
Name
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Playlist
Name”, then press [OK].
2 Enter a name for the Playlist (Picture).
(> 45, Entering Text).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Pictures”,
then press [OK].
2 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Pictures)
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
55
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 56 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)
With this unit, you can select a
copy method from the two
types listed below.
(About copying still pictures
> 63)
Copy
Copy[Video
[Video(HDD
(HDDto
toDVD)]
DVD)]
Easy copying from HDD to DVD
with no difficult settings. (> 58)
Advanced
Advanced Copy
Copy
Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles
or Playlists (Video) in the way you
want. (> 59)
Features
Copy direction
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
Advanced Copy
≤
≤
HDD > DVD
DVD > HDD
≤
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
–
High speed mode copy§1
(> below, Important)
≤
≤
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy
with finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy
from +RW to HDD.
–
≤§2
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalised
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Changing recording mode
Finalise§3
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
–
–
≤
≤
Are chapters maintained?
≤
–§5
≤
–§5
Are thumbnails maintained?
≤
–§6
≤§7
–§6
Recording or Playing while Copying
–
–
≤§8
–
Copying Playlists (Video)
Important
§1
§2
§3
§4
§5
§6
§7
§8
§4
≤: Can do, –: Cannot do
To high speed copy titles (or Playlists (Video) created from those titles), set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before
recording to the HDD (The default setting is “Video format”. > 72).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the
high speed mode does not work.
≥Playlists (Video) created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists (Video) mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments
≥Titles that have been copied to the HDD from a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video)
≥When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format” and “VR format”
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed
> 57)
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does
prevent against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management”
before copying (> 68).
You cannot copy Playlists (Video) with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a Playlists (Video) it will become a title in the destination drive.
[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW]: One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]: Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minute chapters [+R] about 8-minute chapters) when
finalising after copying the disc.
Thumbnails return to the default position.
When copying Playlists (Video), the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
It is possible to record the programmes to the HDD or playback the titles or Playlists(Video) on the HDD.
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.]
–You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
–You cannot play a Playlists (Video) while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (> 24).
–Still pictures or music cannot be played.
56
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 57 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
Recording Recorded
Mode
XP
1 hour
SP
LP
EP (6 hours)
EP (8 hours)
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
Required Speed
time
12 min.
5x
6 min.
10x
3 min.
20x
2 min.
30x
1 min. 30 s. 40x
12X Speed
DVD-R 1
Required Speed
time
5 min. 46 s. 10x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
1 min. 21 s. 44x
58 s.
62x
48 s.
75x
4X Speed
DVD-R DL 2
Required Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s. 8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
1 min. 53 s. 32x
4X Speed
DVD-RW 3
Required Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s. 8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
1 min. 57 s. 31x
8X Speed
4X Speed
4X Speed
+R 4
+R DL 2
+RW
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed
time
time
time
8 min. 20 s. 7x
15 min.
4x
15 min.
4x
3 min. 45 s. 16x 7 min. 30 s. 8x 7 min. 30 s. 8x
1 min. 53 s. 32x 3 min. 45 s. 16x 3 min. 45 s. 16x
≥The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to each disc in the
above list supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area
on where information is written or unique feature on the disc.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc takes.
§2
In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs,
DVD-R DL and +R DL take.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc
takes.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc takes.
Notes
≥ When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥ Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
≥ When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 72).
Copy restrictions
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided)
and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high
speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily
copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following
cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc
when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the
number of titles to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is
greater than 499 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio
may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.
(> 15)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 92) compatible
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥ Titles or Playlists (Video) cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to
the HDD.
≥ Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 47).
≥ You cannot copy Playlists (Video) created from “One time
only recording” titles.
≥ Titles with recording limitations and Playlists (Video) cannot
be registered on the same copying list.
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
The following icons give more information about copy restrictions of the title.
Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in
high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. (> 24, Copyonce recording)
Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in
high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) (However, titles and Playlists
(Video) cannot be copied in high speed mode to
+R or +RW)
[+R]DL]
is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed, even in normal speed mode.
Title or Playlists (Video) contains still picture(s)
≥ Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(> 24, Copy-once recording)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title or Playlists (Video) recorded using a different
encoding system from that of the TV system
currently selected on the unit.
≥ Titles and Playlists (Video) displaying these
marks cannot be selected.
57
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 58 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)
Before copying
Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] ,-. [RAM]: High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Refer to the
following table.
“Recording Format” setting (> 72)
Notes
≥ When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set
to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after
setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)
Copy speed
Check the properties of a title and sort COPY Navigator
Only titles recorded with “Recording Format”
set to “VR format.§
High speed
Perform steps 1–3 of “Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]”.
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title, then press [OPTION].
Only titles recorded with “Recording Format”
set to “Video format”.
Normal speed
COPY Navigator
HDD
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Recording Format” set to
“Video format” and “VR format”.
Properties
OK
RETURN
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in
“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough
space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
Preparation:
≥ Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 15, 18).
≥ Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
≥ Titles and Playlists (Video) recorded using a different
encoding system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system
currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.
≥ [-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)
already recorded on it.
≥ [-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video
already recorded on it.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to DVD)”, then
press [OK].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Rec time
0:52(SP)
All Titles
Total : 0
No. Channel Date
001 BBC 26/9
002 BBC1 27/9
003 AV2 3/10
004 BBC 3/10
005 AV2 4/10
006 BBC2 10/10
007 BBC 10/10
008 BBC 11/10
---
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
Day Time
FRI 13:30
SAT 12:15
FRI 20:00
FRI 22:05
SAT 16:10
FRI 9:25
FRI 13:30
SAT 21:00
Title Name
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Info
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you want to copy, then
press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
5 Press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
58
VQT2J34
Day Time
FRI 13:30
SAT 12:15
FRI 20:00
FRI 22:05
SAT 16:10
FRI 9:25
FRI 13:30
SAT 21:00
Title Name
Page 01/01
Sort
Grouped Titles
Properties
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then
press [OK].
The name, recording date, channel etc. of
the selected title are shown.
≥ [HDD] You can also press [STATUS ] to
display the “Properties” screen when a
title with “ Info” on the bottom of the All
Titles or Grouped Titles screen is
selected.
Sort
(All Titles screen
only)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort”, then press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then
press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are
displayed. You can select to display titles by
No., channel, recording date, day, recording
start time and title name. (You cannot select
this item if a title has a check mark.) If you
close the COPY Navigator screen, the
display order is cancelled.
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL are automatically finalised (> 92). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
No. Channel Date
001 BBC 26/9
002 BBC1 27/9
003 AV2 3/10
004 BBC 3/10
005 AV2 4/10
006 BBC2 10/10
007 BBC 10/10
008 BBC 11/10
---
Rec time
0:52(SP)
In the following cases, even if “Recording Format” is set to
“Video format”, copy will perform at normal speed.
§
All Titles
Total : 0
Notes
≥ If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from
the title at the top of the screen and not in the order you
registered them. To change the order that titles are copied,
create a copying list and then copy the contents of the list
(> 59).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying (> 60)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions (> 57)
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 59 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlists (Video),
then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
– Press [;] again to cancel.
– The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
– When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,
the check mark is cancelled.
– When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: only items indicated with “
” or
“
” can be registered.
Copying using the copying list
—Advanced Copy
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can order titles and Playlists (Video) as desired for copy to
disc.
See also “Before copying” (> 58).
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press
[OK].
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: only items indicated with “
” can be
registered.
– To view other pages (> 56)
5 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (> below)
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient)
(> 60, About the data size for copying).
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
HDD DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
0
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
– If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]
several times (> step 7).
4 Set the copy direction.
– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [4]
(> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive, then press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the recording mode.
– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode”, then press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
– If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
Notes
≥ It is not possible to copy to DVD-R that already
contains JPEG files.
Edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–5 (> above)
6–6 Press [OPTION].
Add
6 Register titles and Playlists (Video) for copy.
– If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
Copy
Cancel All
Delete
Move
Delete All
Delete all items registered on the
copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All”,
then press [OK].
2. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then
press [OK].
Add
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Add”, then
press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
title or Playlists (Video), then press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat
this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
3. Press [OK].
Delete
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”,
then press [OK].
2. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then
press [OK].
Move
Move selected items or change the
order of items on the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Move”,
then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4] to select the
destination, then press [OK].
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)
1 Copy Direction
No.
HDD DVD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the “Blue”
button to select “Playlists”.
Create List
HDD
All Titles
008
007
VIDEO
0:30(XP)
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
---
---
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Playlists
---
---
Page 02/02
Next
Select Previous
Next
Delete All
59
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 60 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Copying titles or Playlists (Video)
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> 59)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
≥ The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a title or playlist (Video), etc. has been recorded or
deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
About the data size for copying
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB (0%)
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Data size recorded to the copy
destination
≥ When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
≥ The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes for
each registered item, because of data
management information being written
to the copy destination, etc.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
– A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record or play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
– Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be
played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
– To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
Notes
When you stop High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When you stop Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with
“One time only recording” restriction, only titles that have
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the
disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete are
not copied and remain on the HDD.
– [-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be
copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step while
copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely
copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the
amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
≥ Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to
the HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥ To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise
them after copy.
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and
re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the
HDD according to the set time
≥ Operations and on-screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥ Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
Preparation:
≥ Insert the finalised disc (> 18).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to
“DVD-Video”) (> 59, Copying using the copying list —
Advanced Copy)
6 Set “Copy Time”.
– If you are not going to change the setting (> step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
– Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off”, then press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
– Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
2
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video
3 Copy Time
60
VQT2J34
hour
00 min.
XP
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.”, then press [3, 4]
to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the
content being played finishes.
– Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
– You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 61 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
– Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising the
disc (> 69).
8 When the top menu is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to start
copying, then press [OK].
My favourite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
Copy Video ( MPEG2 ) from a video
equipment
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have
been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD, etc.
can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or
DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥ You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this
unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥ You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
Video (MPEG2)
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
VIDEO
HDD
Tips
DVD-RAM
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to
stop copying.
≥ If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
Notes
≥ If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while
copying, that portion of title is not recorded.
≥ The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥ The content is recorded as 1 title from the
start of copy to the end.
≥ If play does not begin automatically or if
the top menu does not display
automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.
≥ Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the
original picture and audio quality cannot be exactly
replicated.
≥ If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD
Video Recording format), create a copy list and then copy
(> 59, Copying using the copying list —Advanced Copy).
USB cable

DVD Video Recording format
Preparation:
1. Turn on both this unit and the camera.
2. Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.
3. Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready
for data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.
≥ Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
The display automatically appears when you connect the
camera to this unit. (> 37)
Press [3, 4] to select “Video (MPEG2)”, then press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 59.
USB device
Video ( MPEG2 )
≥ SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the
copy list.
≥ If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Video (MPEG2)” is
not displayed.
61
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 62 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture)
To register on a folder by folder basis (To register Playlists
(Picture))
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder”, then press [OK].
≥ You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or
CD-R/CD-RW.
≥ When you copy a Playlist (Picture), it will become an album in
the destination drive.
Copy
Cancel All
Copying using the copying list
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
5 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”
Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
6 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlist (Picture), then
press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
– To view other pages (> 63)
7 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (> below)
8 Repeat steps 4–7 until you select all necessary folders
(Playlists (Picture)).
9 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy
Cancel All
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
HDD DVD
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
0
Select the copy direction.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
– If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]
several times (> step 7).
4 Set the copy direction.
– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [4]
(> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive, then press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
5 Set the copy mode.
– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]
(> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE”, then press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
6 Register still pictures and Playlists (Picture) for copy.
– If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders or Playlists
(Picture).
– Individual still pictures and folders/Playlists (Picture) cannot be
registered on the same list.
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
≥Only when copying individual still pictures
When specifying another folder as the copying destination, select
“Folder”.
Folder
Cancel All
HDD DVD
Make a new folder and dub ?
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
PICTURE High Speed
3
C
62
VQT2J34
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
New folder
Select the item in step 6–5 (for a still picture) (> left) or
6–7 (for a folder or Playlist (Picture)) (> above)
6–6 Press [OPTION].
or
6–8 Press [OPTION].
Delete All
Add
Delete
Delete All
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Add
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Add”, then press [OK].
2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture
or folder to be added, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step
until you select all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
3. Press [OK].
Delete
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
t Li t
To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
3 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥When you switch between the “PICTURE” and “Playlists”
tab, the check mark is cancelled.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
– To view other pages (> 63)
– To select another folder or Playlists (Picture) (> 63)
5 Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (> right)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
001
002
003
-----
Edit the copying list
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
2 Copy Mode
New folder
8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying.
9 For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK] to start copying.
Copy
1 Copy Direction
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
1 While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press
[OK].
2 Copy Mode
No.
HDD DVD
[HDD] [RAM] ,-. [HDD] [RAM]
[HDD] > [-R] (JPEG)
1 Copy Direction
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
1 Copy Direction
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 63 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
Notes
After performing steps 1–3 (> 62)
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a title, Playlist (Picture), still picture, etc. has been
recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
Copying still pictures on the USB memory
] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Copying all the still pictures
To view other pages or Playlist (Picture)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press
[OK].
– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.
To select another folder or Playlist (Picture)
After performing step 6–2 (> 62, To register individual still
pictures)
1 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the “Folder”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture), then
press [OK].
Create List
Picture (JPEG)
HDD
Folder
PICTURE
Playlists
Create List
Folder
HDD
103__DVD
0001
0002
0003
0004
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
001
002
003
004
---------
PICTURE
Playlists
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
Previous
Page 001/001
Picture 0012
Next
File 0012
OK
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
[USB] > [HDD]
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 18).
The menu is automatically displayed.(> 37)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press [OK].
Copy All Pictures
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.
SELECT
Copy
OK
Cancel
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )”,
then press [OK].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Copying using the copying list
Page 01/01
OK
≥ This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures
and all USB memories for USB device. If additional still pictures
are imported, then the older information will be deleted.
≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number
of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 17),
copying will stop partway through.
≥ You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥ Only DCF-compliant USB media can be used for this function.
≥ Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD.
OPTION
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
≥ Individual still pictures of different folders (Playlists
(Picture)) cannot be registered on the same list.
≥ It is convenient to create a Playlist (Picture) (> 54) if you want to
register still pictures of different folders on HDD in the same list.
[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 18).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 37)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Selected Pictures
( JPEG )”, then press [OK].
Copy
Notes
≥ The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on
the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number
of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 17),
copying will stop partway through.
≥ You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥ [-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures
(JPEG) already recorded on it.
≥ [-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with
video already recorded on it.
Copying new still pictures on USB memory—
Copy New Pictures
[USB] > [HDD]
This unit saves information about imported still pictures.
Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same USB
memory, then only new still pictures will be imported.
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory. (> 18).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 37)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )”,
then press [OK].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
Source
USB
Destination
HDD
USB HDD
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
Start Copying
0
Select the copy direction.
OK
RETURN
4 Perform steps 4–8 on “Copying using the copying
list”. (> 62)
≥ Another folder cannot be selected as the copying
destination on step 7.
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
] for 3 seconds.
Notes
≥ Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.
≥ The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the
same at the copy destination.
≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number
of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 17),
copying will stop partway through.
≥ You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥ Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
63
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 64 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Copying music to HDD
You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s
HDD.
Music CD (CD-DA)
MP3
You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.
Copying music from a CD
[CD] > [HDD]
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
≥ One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
≥ Audio quality: LPCM
≥ The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of
albums that can be recorded will be reduced.
Preparation:
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1 Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”, then press
[OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Recording starts.
Tips
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
≥ The recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be
recorded.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Notes
≥ While copying, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥ Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc
or USB memory.
≥ CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
Copying music from a USB memory or CDR/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3) > [HDD]
You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CDRW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.
≥ One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
≥ The maximum number of albums§ on HDD: 300
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
≥ If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums§
that can be recorded will be reduced.
§ Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be
treated as albums.
1 While stopped
Insert the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVDR DL (> 18).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> 37)
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music ( MP3 )”, then
press [OK].
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set
to “USB>HDD”, “DVD>HDD” or “CD>HDD” and
“MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.
3 Register MP3 files for copy.
You can register MP3 files or file folders.
– MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same
list.
To register individual MP3 files
Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
5 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 65)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
1
2
3
4
To register on a folder by folder basis
Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder”, then press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a
time.
6 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 65)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
1
2
3
4
5
64
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 65 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
For individual files only
≥When specifying an existing folder as the copying
destination
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [OK].
≥When creating a new folder as the copying destination
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
2 Enter the folder name (> 45, Entering Text).
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Notes
≥ The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥ If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy
destination folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following
the existing MP3 files.
≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number
of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 17),
copying will stop partway through.
To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 3 – 5 (for a MP3 file) or 3 – 6 (for a
folder). (> 64, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CDRW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation, then press [OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder, then press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel selection.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1 – 2 (> 64, Copying music from a USB
memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
Notes
≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number
of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 17),
copying will stop partway through.
65
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 66 ページ
Setting
Menus
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Setting On-Screen Display
Accessing the On-Screen Display
When playing discs (except for JPEG discs), you can display
and set the options including disc audio, subtitle, image quality,
sound effect, Repeat Play, etc. In addition, when receiving the
multi-audio broadcast, you can change the audio settings.
Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents.
1 Press [DISPLAY].
Menu
Item
Setting
2 Press [3, 4] to select a menu, then press [1].
3 Press [3, 4] to select an item, then press [1].
4 Press [3, 4] to select a setting.
Follow the on-screen prompts to change individual
settings.
Notes
≥ Some settings may not be changeable, based on the unit’s
current activity (playing, stopped, etc.) and disc contents.
Tips
To exit the on-screen display
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc Menu
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]
You can change the settings of disc audio, subtitle, etc.
Soundtrack
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear (> below, Audio attributes).
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language (> below, Audio attributes,
Soundtrack/Subtitle language).
[VCD] (SVCD)
Select the soundtrack number.
≥ Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Subtitles
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥ Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> below,
Soundtrack/Subtitle language).
[VCD] (SVCD)
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
≥ Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
Audio channel
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
Change audio during playback.
LR / L / R
Angle
[DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
PBC (Playback control > 93) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
Soundtrack/Subtitle language
ENG:
FRA:
DEU:
ITA:
ESP:
NLD:
SVE:
NOR:
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Swedish
Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Audio attributes
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Notes
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
≥ You cannot make a change when there is no recording.
≥ Some discs allow changes to soundtracks, subtitles, and
angles only by using the disc’s menus (> 20).
66
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 67 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Play Menu
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [VCD]
Repeat Play
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items
that can be selected will differ.
Select “Off” to cancel.
Picture Menu
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
You can change the noise reduction setting when playing discs
or of images from the connected device.
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.
≥ On:
≥ Off:
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Video is played back as it is.
Input NR
Reduces the noise while recording.
≥ Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input
from a video tape.
≥ On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
≥ Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to
record input as is.
Sound Menu
You can change the settings of audio when receiving the multiaudio broadcast, and also change the settings of sound effect
when playing discs.
DVB Multi Audio
[MPEG Audio only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
≥ DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
≥ Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
English 1/ English 2
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre
channel)
When “On”, the volume of the centre channel is raised to make
dialogue easier to hear.
Other Menu
Position
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
67
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 68 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
HDD and DVD Management
You can manage discs through formatting, finalising and other
operations.
Accessing the Management Menus
Preparation:
≥ [RAM] Release protection (> below, “Setting Protection”).
≥ Insert a disc.
With the unit stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD drive.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Playlists
Flexible Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
Deleting All Titles
You can delete all titles on HDD or the single-sided DVD-RAM
at once.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
[HDD] [RAM]
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all titles”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– A message appears when deleting is finished.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
≥ Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected.
≥ Still picture data (JPEG), Playlists (Picture), music data or
computer data cannot be deleted.
OK
RETURN
4 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD Management”, “DVD
Management” then press [OK].
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Naming Discs
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give a name for the disc.
≥ [-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to
record still images to that disc.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> above).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”, then press [OK].
Entering Text (> 45).
Tips
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the
name is displayed on the Top Menu.
≥ [+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on
other equipment after creating top menu.
Setting Protection
[RAM]
Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> above).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Protection”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
68
VQT2J34
Formatting Discs
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW.
Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> left).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”, “Format Disc”,
then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Formatting starts ([RAM] may take up to a maximum of
70 minutes).
– A message appears when formatting is finished.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc unusable.
≥ When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not
be possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥ [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format only as DVD-Video format
on this unit.
≥ The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to
format discs the unit cannot use.
≥ Sample pictures are restored when formatting HDD even if
they have been deleted.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 69 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Selecting the background style—Top Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the
DVD-Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu
([+RW]).
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 68).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”, then press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the background, then
press [OK].
Top Menu List
1
2
3
Display after finalising
4
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
7
5
6
01
8
9
Title Name
≥ You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu.
(> 47, Change Thumbnail)
≥ [-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu First —AutoPlay Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Before finalising a disc, select whether the top menu shows
after finalising.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 68).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play Select”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then
press [OK].
≥ Top Menu:
The Top Menu appears first.
≥ Title 1:
The disc content is played without displaying the Top
Menu.
≥ [-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Finalising
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by
finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that
complies with DVD-Video standards. The menu you create with
the unit can also be used on most DVD players.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 68).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise”, then press [OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled (may take up
to 15 minutes) ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)
– A message appears when finalising is finished.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising. This
can render the disc unusable.
≥ When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it
may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen
(approximately 4 times longer).
≥ After finalising
– [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit it.
– [-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
although it becomes play-only after finalising.
– When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
– The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable on
other players depending on the condition of the recording.
– There is a pause of several seconds between titles and
chapters during playback.
– Chapters are created automatically
([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minute chapters§ [+R] about 8-minute
chapters§), if
– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
– the titles were copied using any mode other than the
high speed mode.
§
This time varies greatly depending on the condition and
mode of recording.
Tips
≥ After you have finished recording or copying and try to eject
the disc, a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc
appears (> 26).
Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a
convenient function. We recommend you create the menu
before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (> 68).
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top Menu”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– “Create Top Menu” cannot be cancelled once started.
– “Create Top Menu” takes a few minutes.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
≥ Recording or editing on the disc may delete the Top Menu.
In that case, create the Top Menu again.
≥ You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
69
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 70 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Channel Settings
Setup Menu
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
>
Accessing the Setup Menu
Others
>
Setup
With the unit stopped
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Playlists
Flexible Rec
Recording
HDD Management
Setup
Delete
Copy
(> left, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined”
text.
Tuning
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
3, 4 select “Tuning” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >
OK
OK
RETURN
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select a menu, then press [1] to
go to the item list.
Menus
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Item
Options
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Standby Settings
DVD 1
SELECT
RETURN
5 Press [3, 4] to select an item to change, then
press [OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option, then press [OK].
Notes
≥ Changed settings remain intact even when switching the
unit to standby mode.
Tips
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
English
English
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
Favourites Edit
System Update
Initialize
TAB
Setup
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ]. Even if you have changed an option,
the change is not activated until you press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and
recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the
channel setting itself.
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites
during timer recording standby.
≥Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast
restrictions.
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Favourites Editor
English
English
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
All Channels
1 BBC ONE Wales
2 BBC 2W
3 BBC THREE
4 BBC FOUR
5 CBeebies
6 BBC PARLMNT
7 Community
8 CBBC Channel
9 1Xtra BBC
Favourite Select
SELECT
RETURN
Favourite 1
Add
Add All
Page +
Page –
To select the Favourite
Press the “Green” button.
To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels”
column to add, then press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
Favourite. (Only when no channels have been added to the
Favourite.)
2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite”
column to move, then press the “Green” button.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel,
then press the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To delete channels on a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite”
column, then press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel
itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” column.
To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press the “Red” button. (> 45, Entering Text)
§
When the station name of the “All Channels” column is
highlighted
70
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 71 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
You can restart auto channel setting for digital terrestrial channels if
the setup (> 13) fails for some reason.
If you want to set the channel list best suited to your region, select
“DVB Auto Setup by Region”. Follow the on-screen instructions to
select the region you live in.
However, if you perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB
Auto Setup by Region”, all channel settings, Favourites and all the
timer recording programmes are deleted. (All the settings except for
the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID, Clock and remote control
code, etc. return to the factory preset.) Recordings on the HDD will
not be deleted.
When the confirmation screen appears
Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
2 Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
3 Display the Setup menu again.
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
English
English DVB Signal Condition
DVB Channel
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Tips
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually if the “DVB Auto Setup by Signal
Quality” or “DVB Auto Setup by Region” could not be completed
successfully.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Type
738.0 MHz
10
10
New
English
English
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Radio: 0
CH
Data: 0
RETURN
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
– Select the channel by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal
strength and signal quality.]
2 Press [OK] to start scan.
DVB Manual Tuning
Frequency
[CH54]
738,0 MHz
The set channel is displayed in
0
10
Signal Quality
0
10
the table.
Signal Strength
No.
Channel Name
Type
New
≥Repeat steps 1–2 to tune
BBC ONE Wales
1
TV
2
other channels.
BBC 2W
TV
3
4
5
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
ITV
TV: 15
Radio: 4
TV
Radio
TV
-
Data: 0
8 DVB channels found.
START SCAN
CH
RETURN
3 Press [EXIT], then press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
Add New DVB Channels
You can search for newly added digital terrestrial channels to receive.
Favourites Edit
DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality
DVB Auto Setup by Region
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Channels
Signal Condition
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
DVB Preferred Subtitles
TAB
10
10
Channel +
Channel –
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red)
2–5 (display orange)
The signal quality is so poor that there
may be interference in the pictures and
sound.
The signal quality is basically adequate,
but brief interference in the pictures and
sound is possible in isolated case.
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
DVB Manual Tuning
Frequency
[CH54]
0
Signal Quality
0
Signal Strength
No.
Channel Name
START SCAN
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
0
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Over 5 (display green)
TV: 0
Setup
0
Signal Strength
RETURN
≥You can also use the following method to restart DVB Auto Setup
by Signal Quality.
When the unit is turned on and stopped, press and hold [CH W]
and [X CH] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
– Auto-Setup screen appears.
Setup
[CH54] 20 BBC ONE Wales
Signal Quality
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
≥If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
≥When the signal is weak:
– check that the aerial is correctly positioned.
– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup
menu (> left).
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
– check that your aerial is capable of receiving DVB broadcasts.
DVB Preferred Multi Audio
Choose the audio language for digital broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
[Welsh]
[Gaelic]
[English]
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast.
If the selected language is not available, then the original language
will be selected.
[Welsh]
[Gaelic]
[English]
[English for hearing impaired]
[Welsh for hearing impaired]
[Gaelic for hearing impaired]
Add New DVB Channels
Scan
CH
English
English
27
27
27
27
CH 21
Channel Name
Type
BBC ONE Wales
TV
TV
TV
Radio
BBC 2W
BBC NEWS 24
BBC Radio Wales
68
Quality
9
9
9
9
SELECT
OK
RETURN
TV: 15
Radio: 4
Data: 0
Searching...
RETURN
– The unit starts searching for newly available digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
– The bar over the table shows you the search progress. At the end
of the search, the number of found new digital stations appears.
– “No new DVB channels found.”, is displayed when no new
channels can be found.
Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
Tips
To cancel in middle
Press [RETURN ].
The channels found before stopping are not saved.
71
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 72 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Playback/Recording Settings
>
Others
>
Setup
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
(> 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode.
[EP ( 6hours )]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7GB
disc.
You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7GB
[EP ( 8hours )]
disc.
Chapter Creation
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 48)
Disc
[Automatic]
[5 minutes]
3, 4 select “Disc” > 1 > 3, 4 select item
[Off]
>
Recording Format
OK
Setup
Settings for Playback
Settings for Recording
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Settings for Playback
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the
numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown.
Do not forget your PIN.
≥Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
All DVD-Video can be played.
[8 No Limit]
[1] to [7]
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change PIN]
[Change Level]
[Temporary Unlock]
Soundtrack
[English]
[Spanish]
[German]
[Original]
[French]
[Other¢¢¢¢]
[Italian]
[English]
[Spanish]
[German]
[Other¢¢¢¢]
[French]
[German]
[Other¢¢¢¢]
[French]
[Italian]
Subtitles
[Automatic]
[Italian]
Menus
[English]
[Spanish]
Notes
[DVD-V] Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc
menus. If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if
languages are already fixed on the disc, the language set as
the default on the disc will be played instead.
[Original]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[Other¢¢¢¢] This is the language code setting. Input a
code number with the numbered buttons
(> 84, Language code list).
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is
not available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on the disc.
72
VQT2J34
No chapter start points are set.
Titles recorded to the HDD with “Recording Format” set to “Video
format” can be copied to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode.
However, aspect, etc. is restricted. (> 56, Important)
We recommend turning the setting “VR format” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme. This
setting is effective when recording from a television programme or
external equipment (including DV equipment), or when copying from
a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[VR format]
High speed copy from HDD is possible only to
DVD-RAM.
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[Video format]
[2, 1] to select “Yes“, then press [OK].
≥You are no longer able to switch the audio when
watching a programme on an input channel on
the TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc.).
≥In some cases, copying to DVD-R, etc. using the
high speed mode does not work (> 56,
Important)
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal ( Silent )]
Selecting “Normal ( Silent )” means the noise
generated by this unit is less than “Maximum”,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 73 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Picture and Sound Settings
>
Others
>
Setup
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through the
unit’s Digital Audio Output terminal (> 79).
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96kHz.
Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the
signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has
copy protection.
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with sampling
frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the connected
equipment can process signals with sampling frequency of
96 kHz.)
(> 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Picture
3, 4 select “Picture” > 1 > 3, 4 select item
>
OK
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Dolby Digital§
Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play
TAB
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes Dolby
Digital signals on other connected equipment, or to convert the
signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby
[Bitstream]
Digital decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
Off
Automatic
On
SELECT
DTS§
RETURN
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (> 74)
[On]
Select it to record clear picture if the picture is noisy when
“Off” is selected.
Normally, use this setting.
[Off]
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes DTS
signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to
“PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS
decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in DTS
decoder.
Still Mode
MPEG§
Comb Filter
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 93, Frame
and Field).
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected.
[Frame]
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes MPEG
audio signals on other connected equipment or to convert the
signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in MPEG
decoder.
When connected to equipment without a built-in
[PCM]
MPEG decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between Playlists (Video) chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[On] The chapters in Playlists (Video) are played seamlessly. This
does not work when there are several audio types included on
the Playlists (Video) and when using Quick View (Play k1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change
slightly.
[Off] The points where chapters in Playlists (Video) change are
played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
Sound
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (> 92) [LPCM] (> 93)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
§
Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be harmful
to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded properly
on media such as mini discs.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify
whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.
3, 4 select “Sound” > 1 > 3, 4 select item
>
OK
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Dynamic Range Compression
Off
M1
Bilingual Auto Selection
Digital Audio Output
Audio Mode for XP Recording Dolby Digital
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range (> 92) for easier listening in low volume.
[On]
[Off]
73
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 74 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Display and Connection Settings/System Settings
>
Others
>
Setup
Connection
3, 4 select “Connection” > 1 > 3, 4 select item
>
OK
Setup
(> 70, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Display
3, 4 select “Display” > 1 > 3, 4 select item
>
OK
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
On-Screen Messages 5 sec.
Bright
Unit’s Display
New Channel Message Automatic
On
Screen Saver
Off
FUNCTION MENU Display
TAB
Video
SELECT
RETURN
This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3 standard
aspect TV.
[4:3]
[Letterbox]
[16:9]
Notes
Aspect 4:3/16:9
TAB
4:3
16:9
4:3 standard aspect television
16:9 widescreen television
RETURN
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (> 44) disappears automatically.
The length of time the Control Panel (> 43) is displayed can also be
changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off]
The digital channel information is not displayed.
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
Unit’s Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
Regardless of the setting, when “Power Save in Standby” (> 76) is
activated and this unit is turned off, the unit’s display is turned off.
[Bright]
[Dim]
New Channel Message
Set whether to display the confirmation message when a DVB
channel is added.
When a new DVB channel is added the unit will be
[Automatic]
informed automatically.
[Off]
The Channel Messages are not shown.
Screen Saver
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is
displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
[Off]
FUNCTION MENU Display
[Off]
PAL
SELECT
On-Screen Messages
[On]
16:9
TV Aspect
Setup
[On]
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
TV Aspect
TV System
HDMI Settings
AV 1 Output
AV 2 Settings
When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be
displayed. (> 41)
≥ [16:9]:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen
television.
≥ [4:3]:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is
trimmed for 16:9 picture (> 93,
Pan & Scan).
≥ [Letterbox]: When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, widescreen picture is
shown in the letterbox style
(> 93).
TV System
Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record
NTSC video from another source.
1. Press [3, 4] to select the TV System, then press
[OK].
[PAL]
– Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system television.
Programmes recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.
– Select to record television programmes and PAL input from
other equipment.
– [HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the
HDD.
[NTSC]
– Select when connecting to an NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
– Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
– [HDD] Select when playing an NTSC input title recorded on the
HDD.
The confirmation screen appears.
2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Tips
To change the setting all at once (PAL/NTSC)
While stopped, press and hold [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
Notes
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
≥During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby, this
unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC)
setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing them.
Change back the setting after playback of disc, otherwise recording
may not record propery.
74
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 75 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
AV2 Input
HDMI Settings§1
Set to “RGB / Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB
output from external equipment.
[RGB / Video] The unit automatically detects whether the input
signal from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or
other signals and makes settings.
[RGB]
[Video]
[S Video]
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
§2
You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment.
If you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved
by changing the setting.
– To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to
connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is
connected to an HDTV through other equipment, the other
equipment must also be 1080p compatible.
[576i/480i]
[576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
[1080p]
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are
less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.
Automatically selects the output resolution best
[Automatic]
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Ext Link
[Ext Link 1]
When this unit is connected to a digital satellite
receiver with a 21-spin Scart cable and this unit
receives a control signal.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by
the control signal.
When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
Recording is continued while the image signal is
being sent to the unit from the external equipment.
Recording is stopped when the image signal is halted
by turning the external equipment off.
[Ext Link 2]
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to
show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. 4:3 picture from
HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs,
e.g. Scart, this is not a malfunction of the unit.
Picture output expands left or right.
[4:3]
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
§1
§2
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with side
panels.
Others
Digital Audio Output
3, 4 select “Others” > 1 > 3, 4 select item
[HDMI and Optical]
[Optical Only]
>
Select when this unit is connected to an
amplifier with an optical digital audio cable
(> 79) and connected to a TV with an HDMI
cable (> 79) and you want to enjoy the
highest quality of audio from discs.
VIERA Link
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
[Video]
Select when a TV that can receive a composite signal is connected.
[S Video]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
[RGB 1]
Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you
always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal,
select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to display
the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
[RGB 2]
Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you
would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only when
playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.
OK
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Standby Settings
DVD 1
System Update
Initialize
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
Remote Control (> 84)
[DVD 1]
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
Clock (> 14)
Owner ID (> 13)
In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is stolen,
you can set a PIN number and input your personal information.
Once the PIN number has been set, you cannot return to the factory
preset. Make sure not to forget this.
≥PIN number
≥Name
≥House No.
≥Postcode
AV2 Settings
Set to match the connected equipment.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
75
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 76 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
System Settings
System Update
Standby Settings
≥Press [[OK] to show the following settings.
Power Save in Standby
[On]
It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode when the
unit is in standby mode.
[On
Timer]
“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during the set
time period.(> below)
[Off]
It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.
(Quick Start mode)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “On Timer” and press [OK].
Power Save in Standby
Power Save
From 0 :00
Number
0
9
CHANGE
SELECT
OK
On Timer
To 6 :00
Saves standby power consumption
by disabling Quick Start function and
AV2 loop-through in standby.
Press OK to manually set the period of
Power Save.
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to set the start time (hour).
3 Press [2, 1] to select the stop time and press [3, 4]
to set the stop time (hour).
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
≥You can set start and stop time by the hour.
≥If the clock has not been set, “Power Save in Standby” is activated
at all hours.
Auto Standby
In order to update this unit, the TV Guide download, and support
system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs
software updates.
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,
you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update is in
progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may
damage the unit.
≥TV Guide download will take approximately 30 minutes.
While the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on
the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by
switching on the unit.
≥To avoid hearing the startup sound of System Update for the unit,
perform the following steps.
– Select the time for Software Update (> below, TV Guide/Software
search period).
– Set “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in
Standby” (> below) to “Off”, and update manually (> below,
Software Update Search Now).
TV Guide Download in Standby
[On]
When the unit is turned off, TV Guide data is downloaded
automatically.
[Off]
Software Update in Standby
[On]
You can perform the unit updates automatically when the
unit is turned off.
Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.
After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off once
the set time has passed.
[Off]
[30 minutes]
[1 hour]
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
[Off]
The unit will not automatically turn off.
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and
updates when the unit is turned off. This can only be set when “TV
Guide Download in Standby” or “Software Update in Standby” is set
to “On”.
≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is not available
The unit will give priority to searching for update
[Automatic]
data at midnight.
[02:00–06:00]
[06:00–10:00]
[10:00–14:00]
[14:00–18:00]
[18:00–22:00]
[22:00–02:00]
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is available
[Automatic]
[Daytime]
Updating is executed during daytime (06:00–
22:00).
[6 hours]
Auto Standby after OTR
[On]
This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not
operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing One
Touch Recording (> 26).
[Off]
Auto Standby after Copy
[On]
This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not
operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing
copy.
[Off]
RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )
[On]
Broadcast signals are output from this unit.
TV can receive broadcast signals even if this unit is in
standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using the
RF cable (> 78).
[Off]
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” when the confirmation
message is displayed.
Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce
standby power consumption.
≥Power consumption is lowered additionally when “Power
Save in Standby” is activated.
≥If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV
with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast images
do not appear on TV.
TV Guide/Software search period
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually.
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn this
unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A
message shows that the update has finished.
≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”,
then press [OK].
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.
Post Code
You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area
specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the ratings
level, ratings PIN, Slideshow Settings, Owner ID and clock settings,
etc.
[Yes]
[No]
≥The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
≥Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.
Default Settings
76
VQT2J34
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the tuning
settings, clock settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
PIN, Owner ID and remote control code, etc.
[Yes]
[No]
≥The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
≥Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 77 ページ
Other
Setting
s
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Other Settings
Child Lock
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time
until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD”
appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Tips
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN
“X HOLD” disappears.
] at the same time until
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to
Operate the TV
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to
turn the television on/off, change the television input mode,
select the television channel and change the television volume.
Volume
TV
Turn TV
on/off
Input
select
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
Channel
Select
1 Point the remote control at the TV.
2 While pressing and holding [Í TV], enter the code
from the table below using the numbered buttons.
e.g., 01: press [0] > [1]
3 Test the TV functions of the remote control for
operability.
– If the functions do not work, repeat steps 1 to 3 using
different codes, if available. Some TVs may not be
compatible with the unit’s remote control.
Remote Control Codes for the TV
Manufacturer
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
BENQ
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
Code No.
01/02/03/04
35
27/30
33
05/71/72/73/74
58/59
09
10/15
05
66
69
05
64/65
05
05
05
10/34
61
21
Manufacturer
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HIKONA
HITACHI
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JINGXING
JVC
KDS
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
LOEWE
MAG
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NOBLEX
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
ORION
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
TELEFUNKEN
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
Code No.
53
63/67
05/50/51
05
36
09
52
05/22/23/40/41
05
30
25
49
17/30/39/70
52
45
62
05/50/51
07/46
52
05/28
05/19/20/47
24
36
33
25/26/27/60/61
10
45
30/39/70
05
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
37/38
52
05
05
10
26
32/42/43/65/68
05
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
05/69/75/76/77/78
05/25
18
09
05
08
31/33/66/67/69
10/11/12/13/14
52
52
10/15/44
16/57
05
18/41
77
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 78 ページ
Refere
nce
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Additional Connections
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 42).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1” or “RGB 2” (> 75).
Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (> 75).
Use of the RF coaxial cable
≥ Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
≥ Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
≥ Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
Connect AC mains lead only after all other connections are complete.
BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder
You can enjoy
high-quality
picture by adding
the HDMI cable
connection (> 12)
TV
RF IN
To the aerial
AV
HDMI IN
RF coaxial cable
21-pin Scart cable
HDMI cable
This unit
RF IN
AV1(TV)
RF OUT
The RF coaxial cable cannot
be used for showing pictures
from the unit. The unit must
be connected using another
method, e.g.21-pin Scart cable
to show pictures from the unit
on the television set.
RF IN
AV2 (EXT) HDMI AV
OUT
AV
RF OUT
VCR
To record from a VCR
Refer to “Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver or External equipment” (> 28).
Connecting to a Television with Audio/Video Cable (not included)
≥You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video (AV) cable instead of the HDMI cable or the 21-pin Scart cable (> 10, 11, 79).
≥Using a Scart or HDMI cable gives a higher quality picture than this connction.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
VIDEO
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
TV
Audio cable/Video cable
78
VQT2J34
This unit
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 79 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Adding an Amplifer or Receiver
Use these connections to play sound through speakers
connected to an amplifier or system component.
Using an Audio Cable (not included)
It is possible to output 2-channel stereo sound.
≥ Connect to terminals of the same colour.
AUDIO IN
R
L
Amplifier
or
System Component
This unit
VIDEO
L
R
AUDIO
OUT
Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable (not included)
Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface)
Cable (not included)
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an
uncompressed digital audio and video signal is
transmitted, enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to
an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television),
the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD
video.
≥ Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the
HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥ When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the
HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a
receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function,
linked operations would be possible. [> 42, Linked
Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
ControlTM”/Q Link)]
≥ It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI
cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5m),
RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.
≥ Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
It is possible to output multi-channel surround sound on
DVD-Video.
Receiver
Amplifier or System Component
OPTICAL IN
AV
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
TV
Insert fully with this side up.
Do not bend cable sharply.
HDMI IN
This unit
This unit
AV1(TV)
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
≥ Connect an amplifier or system component with a builtin Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.
≥ Adjust settings in “Digital Audio Output” as needed,
depending on other connections and the amplifer
receiver (> 73).
Notes
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 75).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the terminal
shape of the equipment to be connected.
HDMI AV OUT
Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following
functions are available.
≥ Direct TV Recording (> 26)
≥ Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 75).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
Notes
≥If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel
audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed
(> 92) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI
cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible
with HDCP.
For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital
Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at
all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio cannot
be output).
79
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 80 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Frequently Asked Questions
Set up
How can I enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to
1080p?
¾ Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an
HDMI cable.
Set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p”.
(> 12, 75)
What equipment is necessary to play multi-channel
surround sound?
¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit
without other equipment. You must connect this unit with an
HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder and multichannel speakers. (> 79)
Can the headphones and speakers be directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through
the amplifier, TV, etc. (> 79)
Is my TV compatible with progressive output ?
¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525
(480)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the
manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW
(DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot
directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit
(playback and copy are possible). (> 15, 16)
¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording
compatible discs. (> 94)
¾ After recording but before finalising DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL.
– You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit
after recording them on other Panasonic products or
other manufacturers’ equipment.
– You may not be able to play and record discs on other
equipment after recording them on this unit.
After finalising the disc, however, you will be able to play it
on any DVD-Video compatible player.
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility
with this unit.
¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been
recorded in one of the following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), MP3
and still pictures (JPEG). Close the session or finalise the
disc after recording. This unit can recognize up to 300
folders (groups or albums) and 3000 files (tracks) on a disc
with MP3 or still pictures (JPEG). (> 16, 17)
¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
Discs
DVB-T
Can I play DVD-Video, and Video CDs bought in
another country?
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital
terrestrial broadcasts?
¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not
include “2” or “ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more
information. (> Cover)
¾ Any (terrestrial) roof aerial can be used. However,
depending on the area where you live, a new aerial may be
necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer.
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region
number be played?
Can this unit receive or record High Definition (HD)
broadcasts?
¾ Discs either without region encoding or region code 2 will
not play on this unit.
¾ No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD)
broadcasts.
80
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 81 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
GUIDE Plus+
USB
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a start
and end time that are different from the GUIDE
Plus+ system?
What can or cannot be done using the USB port on
this unit?
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of
programmes in the Timer Recording menu.
But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes, “Guide
Link” will not be able to function. (> 22)
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data via a
connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top
Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings
with digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use
the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer
programming. (> 28, 29)
How can I cancel a timer programming?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and
then press [DELETE ¢]. (> 30)
What happens when I unplug my unit from the
household mains socket?
¾ You can play MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB
memory. (> 37)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory
to the HDD, DVD-RAM. (> 63)
¾ You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.
(> 64)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to
the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 61)
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 17)
¾ This unit cannot be connected to a computer and it cannot
record to an external device. i.e. an external hard drive via
the USB port.
Music
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc
or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
¾ The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the
unit is disconnected from the AC mains for a longer period
of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost.
Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. (> 19, steps 1–2) The
GUIDE Plus+ system data will be automatically updated.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially purchased video
cassette or DVD?
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVDs are
copy protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL, and +RW recorded on the unit
be played on other equipment?
¾ You can play these discs on compatible equipment such as
DVD players after finalising the disc on this unit.
[+RW] It is not necessary to finalise +RW. To enable play on
other DVD players, please use “Create Top Menu” in the
DVD Management menu. (> 69)
¾ In any case, ability to play a disc depends on the condition
of the recording, the quality of the disc, and the capability
and format constraints of the DVD player.
¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible
equipment. Not all equipment will play these discs.
Can a digital audio signal from the unit be recorded
to other equipment?
¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording
DVD, change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the
following via the Setup menu:
– PCM Down Conversion: “On”
– Dolby Digital: “PCM”
– DTS: “PCM”
– MPEG: “PCM”
However, only
– As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
– As long as the recording equipment is compatible with
48 kHz sampling frequency. (> 73)
¾ You cannot record MP3 signals.
81
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 82 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Messages
On the Unit’s Display
H∑∑, F∑∑
(“∑” stands for a service number.)
≥ An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status
of the unit. Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide. If the
service number still does not disappear after the check, reset the unit (> 84, To
restore the unit if it freezes).
≥ If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a
qualified service person.
DVD
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥ The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change the
code on the remote control. (> 84)
GUIDE
≥ GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded. (> 76)
HARD ERR§
≥ If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where
the unit was purchased.
NoERAS
≥ You cannot delete items on this disc.
≥ The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥ The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 18)
≥ The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality. (> 15, 16)
≥ You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press [< OPEN/
CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 7)
NoWRIT
≥ You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
FINAL
≥ When the screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears, the message is
displayed. (> 26)
PLEASE WAIT§
≥ Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
≥ The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while
the message is displayed.
PROG FULL§
≥ There are already 32 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary timer
recording programmes. (> 30)
REMOVE
≥ The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn
the unit off.
SW-DL
≥ The unit is performing a software update. (> 76)
SP 35:50, LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.
≥ Available space on the HDD or disc. The example “SP 35:50” is displayed
when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is displayed
when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and
“151h” means “151 hours”.
UNSUPPORT§
≥ You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto. (> 15, 16)
≥ You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 17)
UNFORMAT§
≥ You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL
or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 26)
EXT-L
≥ This unit is in EXT LINK standby. EXT LINK has been turned on and will stop
operation on the unit until the recording has completed.
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or cancel linked timer. (> 28)
F74
≥ The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains displayed, consult the
dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75
≥ The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data
malfunction. If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains
displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U59
≥ The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until
the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the
cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
≥ (When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is
displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation. Once
the display disappears you can use the unit again.
If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U76
≥ HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not
support copyright protection.
§
The message are alternately displayed.
82
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 83 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
On the Unit’s Display (Continued)
U80, U81, U99
U88
X HOLD
≥ The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit
to standby mode. Press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on. If the
message persists, perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71) or “Shipping Condition” (> 76). If it remains displayed, consult
the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥ There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or
copying; there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected
while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its recovery process. This
process restores the unit to normal operation. Wait until the message
disappears.
≥ If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
≥ The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD”
disappears. (> 77)
On the TV
Cannot finish recording completely.
Copy-protect signal was detected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles
are recorded.
Cannot finish recording completely.
Cannot record.
Maximum number of titles exceeded.
≥ The programme was copy-protected.
≥ The HDD or disc may be full.
≥ The maximum number of title has been exceeded. (> 25)
≥ [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by erasing unwanted titles. Even if you
erase recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no
increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is deleted (space may
increase slightly when you delete other titles). (> 23, 46, 68)
≥ Use a new disc.
≥ You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of
Cannot playback.
the TV system currently selected on the unit.
TV system is different from the setting.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 74)
To playback, please change the TV System
in Setup.
Cannot play on this unit.
≥ You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 17)
No Disc
≥ The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing
up.
≥ Ensure the disc is flat in the tray
No folders.
≥ There is no compatible folder on the media. (> 17)
Not enough space in the copy destination. ≥ Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 23, 46, 53, 68)
≥ Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the
“Destination Capacity” is not exceeded. (> 59, 62, 65)
This is a non-recordable disc.
≥ The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 7)
≥ The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or
Unable to format.
unfinalised DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +RW disc. (> 15)
This disc is not formatted properly.
≥ You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW disc.
Format it using DVD Management
Format the disc with the unit. (> 68)
in FUNCTION MENU.
≥ You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
Not enough space on HDD.
≥ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on
Space of 4 hours ( in SP mode ) is
the HDD or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the
necessary.
titles to be copied are greater than 499.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 23, 46, 68)
Maximum number of titles is recorded on
HDD. Please delete unwanted titles.
$
≥ The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
83
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 84 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Troubleshooting Guide
When Other Panasonic Products Respond
to this Remote Control
To Reset This Unit
Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote
control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic
products close to your unit.
With the unit stopped
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [1].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote Control”, then press
[OK].
6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].
To reset the unit’s settings
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
When this unit is turned on and stopped.
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit for
about 5 seconds .
– The Auto-Setup starts automatically. (> 13)
To reset the ratings level settings
When this unit is turned on and stopped.
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray.
2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
3 Press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY/a1.3) on the
main unit for about 5 seconds.
Remote Control
Setup
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner
ID, Clock and remote control code, etc. return to the factory
preset. The timer recording programmes and Favourites are
also cancelled.
Press “” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
Display
Connection
Others
To restore the unit if it freezes
OK
RETURN
7 While pressing and holding [OK], press and hold the
numbered button [1], [2] or [3] corresponding to the
code set in step 6 for more than 5 seconds to set.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
On the main unit
Press and hold [Í/I] for more than 3 seconds.
– The unit is turned off.
When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display
– Change the code on the remote control to match the code
displayed for the main unit (> step 7).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Language code list
Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Amharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani:
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577
84
VQT2J34
Catalan:
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
Gujarati:
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
7185
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
Lingala:
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto, Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:
7678
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 85 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions
indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:
≥ Regular disc rotating sound.
≥ Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥ Image disturbance during search.
≥ Periodic interruptions to the reception due to digital satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥ Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save in Standby” is activated.
≥ Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
≥ The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices (> 84, To restore the unit if it freezes).
≥ When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
General Issues:
Power
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (> 11)
¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in
recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks
when [Í] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the
recording standby. (> 28)
¾ Check the fuse in the plug.
The unit switches to standby mode.
The unit is turned off automatically.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on
the main unit to turn the unit on.
¾ If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible
TV with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Linkcompatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit
will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is
set to standby mode. (> 42)
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link
(HDAVI Control 4 or later). For details please read the
operating instructions for the TV.
General Issues:
Displays
The display is dim.
¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 74)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (> 14)
The time recorded on the disc and the available time
shown do not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is different from the
actual recording time or MP3 recording time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not
increase even if titles are deleted.
¾ Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW
disc increases when you delete the last title (space may
increase slightly when you delete other titles).
¾ If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining
capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced
and then recording or editing may be disabled (for the
second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after
about 60 times).
¾ The time during searching may not be displayed accurately.
The clock is not correct.
¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic
time correction function may not work.In this case,
“Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the
Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually.
(> 14)
Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed
time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds)
to one second. There will be a slight difference between the
time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual
one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59
minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
The clock does not display on the unit when
switched to standby.
¾ Ensure “Power Save in Standby” is deactivated. (> 76)
85
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 86 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues:
Operation
Cannot operate the TV with unit’s remote control.
¾ Change the manufacturer code on the remote control.
(> 77)
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control
again after changing the batteries. (> 84)
The remote control doesn’t work.
Startup is slow.
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ Deactivate “Power Save in Standby” in the Setup menu.
(> 76)
¾ The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct
code. (> 84)
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
(> 7)
¾ Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the
main unit. (> 7)
¾ Remove obstacles between the remote control and the
main unit.
¾ Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit’s
sensor.
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/
transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas
that may be subject to sun exposure.
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again
after changing the batteries. (> 77)
¾ If the “X HOLD” is displayed on the unit’s front display, the
Child Lock function is activated. (> 77)
¾ If the “EXT-L” is displayed on the unit’s front display, Linked
timer recordings with external equipment is in recording
standby. (> 28)
General Issues:
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ There was a programme change or GUIDE Plus+
information from a broadcast station was possibly not
correctly transmitted.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the
GUIDE Plus+ system provider or station provider.
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly. (> 20, 21)
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait
until “U59” disappears. (> 82)
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit
(> 84, To restore the unit if it freezes).
¾ The unit cannot be operated while performing an update.
“SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display while it is updating.
Please wait until the “SW-DL” disappears. (> 76)
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may
be defective. Do the following to eject the disc. Try another
disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the
unit (> 84, To restore the unit if it freezes).
2 While the unit is turned off, press and hold [∫] and
[CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about 5
seconds. (Ejection may take extra time depending on
discs.)
Cannot eject a disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
¾ The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in 2 above.
¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in
recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks
when [Í] is pressed.) Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the
recording standby.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does
not work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 28, 77)
86
VQT2J34
GUIDE Plus+
The GUIDE Plus+ system does not receive any data.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 14)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception),
the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be able to receive any
data.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.
¾ Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+
system.
¾ Programme the timer recording manually. (> 29)
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
The GUIDE Plus+ information is not displayed
properly.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not updated.
¾ The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the
data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode (“EXT-L” lights up in
the unit’s display), then the data update may also not work.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (> 14)
¾ Make sure that “TV Guide Download in Standby” is set to
“On” in the Setup menu. (> 76)
General Issues:
DVB-T
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ Check the connections. (> 10, 11, 78)
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV
station, or the direction of the aerial may have changed due
to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your
local TV aerial installer.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided
between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by
using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 87 ページ
General Issues:
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
DVB-T (Continue)
After “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB
Auto Setup by Region” only some or no DVB
channels are found.
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB
transmissions.
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for
DVB.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels, “No
Signal” message is displayed.
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal
Strength” are displayed in red or constantly changing,
check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial
installer. (> 71)
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for
DVB.
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges, etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check aerial connection.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning”.
(> 71)
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all
channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or
distant lightning storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy”
locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute
or distort momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used
electrical appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower
with a “noisy” ignition system.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
Unusual station sorting.
¾ The station sorting of this unit is pre-defined. Use
Favourites to sort the stations as you want them. (> 70)
The digital channel information does not appear.
Do an Auto-Setup again and let it continue right through to
the end.The data is only saved after this has been
completed.
The Signal Strength is over 100% (> 10)
¾ Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. (> 71)
After performing an software update, you can no
longer receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the software update, some
settings may have returned to the preset values.
Perform “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu and then
set the channel.(> 13, 76)
General Issues:
VIERA Link
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the unit is powerng on.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 75)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected
device.
¾ Some functions may not work depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit
supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with an
HDMI cable was changed, or if there was a power failure or
the plug was removed from the household mains socket,
“HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the
following operations.
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with
the power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this
unit, and after this unit’s screen is displayed, check that
“HDAVI Control” is working.
The Control Panel does not appear.
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function. (> 43)
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is
interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you
press buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for
VIERA Link functions.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 74)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during
playback or recording.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
No Digital Teletext
¾ Not all functions of Digital Teletext work on this unit.
¾ When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital
channel information is displayed, Digital Teletext does not
work.
¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup
menu. (> 71)
After the Auto-Setup, there aren’t any stations in the
station list although found stations were displayed
during Auto-Setup.
¾ “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the
delivery status. The Auto-Setup was then started and
interrupted.
87
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 88 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues:
USB
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then
insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and
turn on the unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 18)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (> 17, 18)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 18)
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or
a USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 17)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the
USB memory may not be recognized by this unit.
Playback Issues:
Picture
The images from this unit do not appear on the TV.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,
12, 78, 79)
¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.
¾ Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input
of the TV. (> 10, 11, 12, 78, 79)
¾ Make sure the TV’s input setting (e.g., AV1) is correct.
¾ The TV isn’t compatible with RGB signals.
Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “Video”. (> 75)
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system
used by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep
pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5
or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
(> 74)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc
that matches with this unit’s TV system.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect are stretched
vertically.
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV.
Refer to your television’s operating instructions.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 67)
There is no apparent change in picture quality when
making adjustments in the Picture menu using the
on-screen display.
¾ The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an
HDMI cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control,
but you may not be able to see the beginning of the title
played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:],
return to the beginning of the title.
The picture is distorted during play, or video will not
play correctly.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,
12, 78, 79)
¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.
TV reception worsens or becomes impossible after
connecting the unit.
Playback Issues:
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided
between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by
using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.
¾ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit’s RF
OUT terminal. Select “On” in “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” in
the Setup menu.(> 76)
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on
or off. To confirm the timer recording is going to work
properly, turn the unit on.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the
display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if
there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to
return to the previous screen.
¾ Set “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu to “Off” to turn off the
screen saver function. (> 74)
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right.
Screen size is wrong.
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in
the Setup menu to “16:9”. (> 75)
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
(> 74)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the
88
TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.
VQT2J34
Sound
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output”
settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have
connected one. (> 10, 11, 12, 73, 75, 79)
¾ Check if TV is muted.
¾ Check if amplifier is muted.
¾ Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing
playback and simultaneous record and playback.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT terminal.
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of
connected devices.
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI
cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in
the Setup menu. (> 75)
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.
(> 10, 11, 12, 78, 79)
¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 89 ページ
Playback Issues:
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Sound (Continued)
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while
DVD drive is selected.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 73)
¾ When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio
channels, this unit will record only the audio channel
selected in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen display. The
audio channel cannot be switched during playback. (> 67)
¾ You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to
“PCM” or connect using audio cables (analogue
connection). (> 73, 79)
¾ There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to
how the disc was created.
Playback Issues:
Operation
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 18)
¾ The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (> 7)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on
the unit. (> 15, 16, 18)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title
that was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic
DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible
due to copyright protection.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using EP ( 8 hours ) mode,
play may not be possible on DVD players that are
compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP ( 6 hours )
mode. (> 72)
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or
messages are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted
titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using
the high speed mode.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play
k1.3).
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers,
the unit automatically switches between layers and plays
the title in the same way as a normal programme. However,
video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is
switching layers. (> 15)
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle
number. (> 66)
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ This function depends on software availability. Angles can
only be changed during scenes where different angles are
recorded.
You have forgotten your ratings PIN.
¾ With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1/a1.3] on
the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or more seconds.
Quick View (Play k1.3) does not work.
¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
¾ This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
– press [∫] several times.
– open the disc tray.
– [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.
– execute a recording or timer recording.
The Video CD picture does not display properly.
¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV
System” in the Setup menu. (> 74)
¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture
cannot be displayed correctly during search.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System”
settings are different from the title recorded on the disc.
(> 74)
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an
HDMI cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control,
you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played
until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return
to the beginning of the title.
¾
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ Ensure the DVD-Video region number for the disc is
correct, and the disc is not defective. (> Cover)
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Change this setting. (> 72)
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change
the soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s
menus to make changes. (> 20)
89
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 90 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Issues:
Music
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD])
can be displayed with this unit.
Playback Issues:
Still Pictures
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy
or while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording
with external equipment.
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as
Progressive JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 17)
Recording/Timer
Recording Issues: Recording/Copying/
External input
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot
be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto.
(> 15)
¾ [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is unformatted.
Format the disc. (> 68)
¾ The disc is protected with the “DVD Management” settings.
(> 68)
¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times
they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 24, 92)
¾ The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles ([HDD]
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use another disc. (> 23, 46, 68)
¾ You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on
this unit. Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
¾ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images
recorded on it.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.
Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy.
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you
will copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the
entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP
mode recording is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to
be copied has exceeded 499. (> 23, 46, 68)
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL discs.
However, you can record and copy again if you format
DVD-RW.
¾ If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off
about 50 times or more, the recording or editing of DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and
+RW discs may be disabled.
¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL and +RW discs recorded on this unit may not be
recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already
have PAL signal recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto
the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another
unit is not guaranteed. (> 74)
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected. (> 15, 24, 92)
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer
programme times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 30)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (“F” in
the timer recording list is not on.) (> 30)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the
“Red” button.
¾ The clock is not correct. Set the clock. (> 14)
¾ The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system
may not be correct. It is recommended to modify the start
and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes. (> 22)
Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is
pressed.
¾ When using the linked timer recording with external
equipment, press [EXTLINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display
disappears.) (> 28)
¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit
while “Power Save in Standby” is not activated (Quick Start
mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
¾ Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press
[DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive. (> 21)
90
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 91 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Recording/Timer
Recording/Copying/
Recording Issues:
External input
(Continued)
The timer programme remains even after recording
finishes.
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily, weekly or
series timer recording. (> 29, 30, 33)
Part or all of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is
disconnected from the household mains socket while
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc
may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee
regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc
([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. (> 68)
Cannot record video or sound from the external
device.
¾ The external device is not correctly connected. (> 11, 12,
78, 79)
¾ Select AV2 input channel for the equipment you have
connected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.
Recording Issues: Music
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be
guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
Stripe-shaped black noise is recorded.
An external playback device is interfering with the TV because
the device is too close to the TV. Move the device away from
the TV.
The programme name and the recorded title do not
match.
¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was
set but the recorded title still has the old programme name.
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high
speed mode.
¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Recording Format” to
“Video format” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is
“Video format”). (> 72)
¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work,
even if the titles were recorded with “Recording Format” set
to “Video format”. (> 56)
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5
hours or longer)” mode
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP”
mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD
Recorders with “Recording Format” (“Rec for High Speed
Copy”) set to “Video format” (“On”), and then copied to the
HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs
with high-speed copy.
When copying, it takes a long time even in high
speed mode.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording.
Even if the disc is high speed recording compatible, the
maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition
of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6
hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are
not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating DVD-R, etc.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the
sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.
91
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 92 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Troubleshooting Guide
Editing Issues:
HDD & DVD
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no
available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
(> 23, 46, 68)
Glossary
Bitstream
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by
a decoder.
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM-compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe
dry. (> 7)
¾ Disc may be defective or of poor quality.
¾ You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the
unit. (> 15, 16, 68)
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the
disc when you turn it off or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in
the power.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other.
You cannot set an end point before a start point.
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ [HDD] [RAM] When the chapter is too short to delete, use
“Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 48)
The available recording time doesn’t increase
even after deleting titles on the disc.
¾ Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL
does not increase even after deleting previous titles.
¾ Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases when you delete the last title.
Cannot create a Playlist (Video).
¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the
title also includes still pictures. Select them individually.
Editing Issues:
Still Pictures
Can not copy JPEG files to disc.
¾ You can copy JPEG files from HDD to DVD-RAM or
DVD-R or from USB memory to DVD-RAM. (> 62)
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMI (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be
reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep
Colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the
connected TV.]
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2 channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information
can be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this
unit can only output the front two channels.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.
This means you can hear dialogue clearly at low volume.
Film and Video
DVD-Video are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film:
Video:
Finalise
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC
discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama
programmes or animation.
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and
+R DL on the unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and
you can no longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be
formatted to become recordable.
92
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 93 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk, disc where groups of data are stored
together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures
(JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format), +RW,
and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.
Frame and Field
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see on
your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.

Frame

Field
Field
≥A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between
them, but picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk with a
surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and a
magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and
writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i) and 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminal. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If
you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the
data will be compressed to 1/101/100 of its original size. The benefit of
JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of
compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately
1/10 of its size without any significant loss of audio quality.
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will be
viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit
regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and
“Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the
picture itself appears in an aspect
ratio of 16:9.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and
blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By
dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is
reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values
displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the
signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive
are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region,
length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a matrix.
1080i
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i
(1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i),
the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a
minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high-definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a
minimal amount of screen flicker.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of
various international patents and patent applications owned by, or
licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related
affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE
ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS
RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE
GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com/
The recording and playback of content on this or any other device
may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such
rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not
grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or
intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your
responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device
complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please
refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and
regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content
you wish to record or playback.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus on the screen.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
93
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 94 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Specifications
Video In (PAL/NTSC):
Power supply:
AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power consumption:
Approx. 31 W
Standby mode: (“Power Save in Standby” is
Approx. 0.3 W
activated and “RF OUT
( Aerial Signal )” is set to
“Off”.)
(“Power Save in Standby” is
Approx. 11 W
not activated.)
S-Video In (PAL/NTSC):
RGB In (PAL):
Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
S-Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 2–3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2–5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0)
1–8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R (DL): 2–4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2–8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1–2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2–6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R (SL):
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4–16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R (DL):
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Recording system:
DVD-RAM:
DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording time:
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Maximum Approx. 279 hours with 160 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 35 hours
SP: Approx. 70 hours
LP: Approx. 140 hours
EP: Approx. 209 hours/279 hours
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM:
DVD Video Recording format,
JPEG
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format, MP3§1, JPEG§1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format, MP3§1, JPEG§1
DVD-RW:
DVD Video Recording format,
DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD§2
CD-R/CD-RW:
CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, SVCD§1, §2,
MP3§1,JPEG§1
Internal HDD capacity:
160 GB
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER Specification
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length:
780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted
with the safety protection
Television system
Tuner System:
DVB-T
Channel Coverage:
UK
UHF:
21 to 68 ch
RF converter output:
Not provided
Video
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
Video system:
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
Recording system:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Notes
≥Specifications are subject to change without notice.
94
VQT2J34
RGB Out (PAL/NTSC):
Audio
Recording system:
Audio In:
Input Level:
Input Impedance:
Audio Out:
Output Level:
Output Impedance:
Digital Audio Out:
USB
USB port:
USB standard:
Format:
Video (SD-Video)§3
Codec:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin),
1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
AV2 (21 pin)
1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
AV2 (21pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠,
termination
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin
jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
AV1 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠,
termination
AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠,
termination
Dolby Digital 2 ch, Linear PCM (XP
mode)
AV1/AV2 (21 pin)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
More than 10 k≠
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin
jack)
Standard: 0.5 Vrms,
Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Less than 1 k≠
Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby
Digital, DTS, MPEG)
Type A: 1 pc
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment
Video Profile)
File Format:
SD-Video format conforming
HDMI Output:
19 pin type A: 1pc
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.
Others
Regional Code:
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
Dimensions (WaHaD):
Mass:
§1
§2
§3
#2
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH
(no condensation)
430 mma59 mma286 mm
Approx. 3.5 kg
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
Conforming to IEC62107
This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the
market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to
IEC62107.
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from Panasonic
digital video camera with HDD, etc. to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After
Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc,
the playback is possible.
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 95 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Information for Users on Collection and
Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging,
and/or accompanying documents mean that
used electrical and electronic products and
batteries should not be mixed with general
household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling
of old products and used batteries, please
take them to applicable collection points, in
accordance with your national legislation and
the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries
correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative
effects on human health and the environment
which could otherwise arise from inappropriate
waste handling.
For more information about collection and
recycling of old products and batteries, please
contact your local municipality, your waste
disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect
disposal of this waste, in accordance with
national legislation.
CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER
MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED
WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON
THE APPARATUS.
≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO
USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
For business users in the European
Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic
equipment, please contact your dealer or
supplier for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other
Countries outside the European Union]
CAUTION
These symbols are only valid in the European
Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask
for the correct method of disposal.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two
symbol examples):
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily
accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
Cd
This symbol might be used in combination with
a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with
the requirement set by the Directive for the
chemical involved.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
(Back of product)
(Inside of product)
≥For your safety, be sure not to connect or handle the equipment with
wet hands.
95
VQT2J34
DMR-EX773EB_VQT2J34-B.book 1 ページ
2010年1月7日 木曜日 午後5時8分
Index
A Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 40
Album (Still picture)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Audio
Digital broadcast
(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 71
Audio Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 44
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . 31
AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
C Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 29
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 48
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 72
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11, 78
Amplifier, system component,
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Digital satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 79
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12, 78–79
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Copy
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Title/Playlist (Playlists) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 55
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 48
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 54
D Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 50
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 46
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 73, 75
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 44
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 67, 71
DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 71
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 74
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Digital satellite receiver
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Watching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
M
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . 35, 38, 46, 51
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–16
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 44
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
DVB Multi Audio
Recording with selected audio . . . 21, 29
Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 71
DVB Subtitle
Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 29
Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 55
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment — Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
EXT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 92
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 93
FR (Flexible recording mode) . . . 25, 27
FREEVIEW+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . 41, 74
GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 32–34
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . 12, 42–43, 75, 79
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 75, 79
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18, 38–39, 93
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 72
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 72
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital
satellite receiver) — EXT LINK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 28, 75
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 93
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Menu
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 18, 93
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 40
Music on HDD
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
N Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 55
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 46
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 74
O Owner ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
P Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 73
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power Save in Standby . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 52
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Protection
Album (Still Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Q Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
R Ratings level settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 29–34
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 67
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
S Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 27
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 72
Start Slideshow
Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Subtitle
Digital broadcast (DVB Subtitle) . . 44, 71
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 72
Still Pictures and Music—Editing . . . 52
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
T Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 29–34
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70–71
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
U USB
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
V VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . 12, 42–43, 75, 79
EU
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
© Panasonic Corporation 2010
p
VQT2J34
F0110TJ0
Download PDF

advertising